EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide

Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C

Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2

Date February 2003 February 2003

Pages 1-594 595-643

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. ACE, DBACCESS, DIALOG, DMRS, EE CMS, EE Power, EE Raceway, EE Schematic, EE Wiring Diagram, IGDS, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
 1984-2003 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

................................ drop_point ........................................................................................ wway_spec ................................................ cond_spec ................................................................................................................................................................................................ ee_units ............................. rcp ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ............................................................................................... tray_spec ....................................................................................................... envelope .................................................... ee_system .................................................................................... ee_cond_x_area .................................... manual_part ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ project .................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_size ............................................................. wway_part .......................................... ee_pcbl_config .........................._ _______________ cond_part ...................................................................................................................... cabsch_spec ............................................................................................................................................. drawing ................................................... ee_pcbl_code ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ to_support .................................................................................. pullbox .............................................................................. ee_pcbl_color ........................................................................ light_fixture ................................................................................................................................. one_line ......................................................................... mscolumns ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... rcp_type ................................................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ............................................................................................................ drawing ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ee_yes_no ................................................. tl_fit_env ........................................................................................................................................................................................ mscatalog .............................................................. panel ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ mscodelist ....................................................................................... ee_unique ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... cndsch_spec ....................................................................... ee_graphic_only ..................................................... EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ..................... tl_type ...................................................................................................................................................................... drop_point ................................... tl_qual ............................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .................................................................................. vendor ............. to_equip ..................................................................................................... tl_subtype ............................................................................................................. drawing_type ................. ol_type ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. tray_part ......................... duct_spec .......................................................................................... Table of Contents 459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491 13 ........................................................................................................................................................

........................................................... process........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ to_support .......... mscatalog ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Symbol Processor File ............................. mscolumns ........... print............................................................ EE Nucleus File Structure ............................ report................................................................................................ fitting .......................................... panel ............................................................................................................................................................................ panel_to_drw .............................................. EE Raceway File Structure ........unl Files ... project ................................ rcp_to_drw ..........................................................................dat ...................................._ _______________ duct_fill ............................................ rcp_to_sys .................................................................................................. Sample .............................................................dat ........................................... manager........................................................................ rcp ................ str_to_sys ................................................................................................... fit_to_sys ............................................................................................................................................................................... ee_system .........................................................................................dat ...................................................... sys_to_drw ................................ Appendix F: EE File Structure ....................... 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications .................................................... ol_to_sys ....................... rule_chk............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14 .............................................................dat ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Available Fittings .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files .................................................................................................... eden......................................................................................................................................................................................................... straight ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Update Reference Schema .............................................................................................................................dat .............................................................. ee_pseudo_cable ............................... Appendix D: Specification ........... envelope .................dat ................................................ one_line ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ......................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... Project Drawing List (drwlst) ............................................................................................. Appendix J: Reports ..............._ _______________ Appendix H: alias............ Associated Software/Files .................................................. Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) ............................................................................ RIS Report Processing ........................................................................ Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ......................................... Information Output: ........ Information Output: ......................................................................................................................... Information Output: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Table Information Form ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) ........................................................................................................... Drop Table Form ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager .................................................................................cmd file ................................................. Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ............................................................................... Alter Table Form . Associated Software/Files ............................................................................................................... Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form ...................................................................................................................................................... Data Definition Form ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Schema File Form ..............cmd ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix I: rway........... Associated Software/Files .................................. Associated Software/Files ............................................................ Information Output: ......................... Set Form ................................................... Create Table Form ..... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume ........ Associated Software/Files ..................................................................................................................................................................... Drop Schema Form ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 ........................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ......................................................................... Information Output: ................................................................................................. Alter Schema Form ......................................................................................................................... Create Schema Form ..........................................

........................................ 16 ...................................................... Database Edit Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ..................................................................._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ...................................................................... EE Manager ...................................................... Glossary ............................................................................. Appendix N: EE Configure ........................................................................................... Index .....................................................................................................................

intergraph.com. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U. convenient.S.com/ppo/services/support. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.asp. Our web address is: http://www.com. Alabama 35758 U. If you are outside of the United States.com. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.S.A.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products. please call your local Intergraph office.intergraph. please call your local Intergraph office. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. services. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. If you are outside the United States.S._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast. and direction. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www. 17 . Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison.intergraph.

_ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed. AL 35758 18 . Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. let us know.

Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. these include Informix. appendices. numbered sections. a glossary. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. you should be familiar with a text editor. and Ingres. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. 19 . modify. Currently._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. Also. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. grouped according to function. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. Oracle. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. and an index. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. This document is designed as a reference. such as vi or EMACS.

contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. This includes information on the screen display. File Name readme. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative. Describes the graphics environment for the product.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. Describe the product environment. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. forms. and on-line Help. Provides special notices to the customer. menus. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. Provides installation instructions. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. For a fixes release. For international locations. 20 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

For example. The text is placed in the viewing plane. which requires an action be taken by the user. phrases. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. Key in original. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. 21 . or dialog box title. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words.dat to load the ASCII file. Choose File > Open to load a new file. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. For example. Bold Indicates a command name. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response.rpt file. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. or groups of related information. For example. For example. For example._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. parameter name.

22 . Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. which map menu selections to key combinations. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. To press the Escape key. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. then K.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. Need a hint — used with activities and labs.February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises.

Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. you click the action you want to affect the item._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. After selecting an item. you would select items to define parameters. Select the file original.dat to load it into the new surface. In a dialog box. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. For example. Select the line string to define the graphic template. right-button chord. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. For example. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. Double-click on the file original. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. Click Apply to save the changes. Selecting does not initiate an action. For example. In addition. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. To key a character string into a text box. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. For example.dat from the list box. such as selecting toggle buttons. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 24 .

EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model._ _______________ 1. Introduction 1. modify. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. 25 . and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product.

Oracle. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. or Notepad. The software covered includes baseline and application software. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. all projects have been archived. EMACS. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix._ _______________ 2. If you are updating. 2. You must be familiar with a text editor. and EE Raceway Modeling. such as vi. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . On-line Informix. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. or Ingres.

you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation. Additionally._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 28 . Based on these two setups. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. For the purposes of this installation. and the server-client workstation. First. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. or remotely on a server. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important. followed by the EE application products.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. the workstation as server. A database can reside locally on each workstation. you should load system nucleus software. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server.

and serial number (as delivered). Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. This form expects your user name. First. 2. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. or it may be on your local system. company. 29 . Installation Procedure 2. 1. Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. Double-click on setup._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly. 4. including a valid serial number. This will invoke the product selection form. This may be a networked drive. Download/Install 3. Once you know what application software you need. based on your system configuration.

Place an X next to the software you wish to install. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software.) When all information has been provided. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. client.February 2003 5. If server is selected. you must provide the installation path. Among other installation options that vary according to product. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or server). If local is selected. select Load Components. you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. A message box will appear. as well as path to the software on the server. When all software to be loaded has been selected. 30 . and a local path to the icon associated with the software. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path.) If client is selected. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. select OK.

Before you can enter the EE environment. Before executing the software. 6.cfg file. otherwise select No. EE Configure. Copy the ee. EE Readme. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. This program group contains the EE Manager. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. the EENUC (Common) program group will be created. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software. 2._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. you will modify this copied file. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 .cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. Download/Install 8.) 7.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. EE Help. you must set the environment variables in your ee. and not to a previously-selected file. When the software has successfully loaded.txt. 9. Set your user environment variables. (Your login directory will be fine. and EE Nucleus icons.

and no more changes are needed. then select Set. To modify the value of that variable. 32 . After all variables have been set properly for your environment. select OK to save the modifications to the ee._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This will close the EE Configure utility. This displays the current value and description for that variable.February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set. key the desired value into the Value field.cfg file.

See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. 2. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide. and 202 for reference schema._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. Download/Install 33 . and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. 3. Also.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. Also. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. 1. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. What follows is a very basic outline. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. Databases 2. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. 4. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. Create empty RIS schemas. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Update your project and reference schemas. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide.February 2003 5. 34 . The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas.

When you key in EE. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. the Project Menu displays: 3._ _______________ 3. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. All EE drawings are organized by project. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create. 35 . click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form.

Message Area .a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue.displays messages from the software.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . 36 .control the EE form. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes. use standard EMACS commands.February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or key in. Listing Area . To turn off an active option. To edit information you key in to input fields. check with your system manager. select another option. The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list.for keying in or displaying data about a project. These options can display additional forms or menus. Options List . and then to select. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. If you do not know the appropriate addresses.

When a particular option is active. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. all of the available listings are currently displayed. For example. 3. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. 37 . the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. When listings fill more than one page. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. and executes the active process. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. provide the necessary input._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. and then select Confirm (√). The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings.

February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. if there are more than one. Delete — Deletes EE project files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. 38 . Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects.

3. Steps 1. A . though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. Create 3. and key in the new project name. 39 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. Select the Project name field. 2. so you are not required to key in this extension. Multiple files can exist within a single project. which itself can span multiple products. page 553 . Select Create from the Project Menu option list.prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). For information about creating a project schema. Select Confirm (√) to create the project. see RIS Schema Manager.

This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. You may also key project names into this field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and the schema passwords. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. if they exist. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. the project and reference schemas. You will need to input the names of the project. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. 40 . This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. if one has been defined. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name.

4. The EE Product Menu displays. — OR — Select the Project name field. page 553 . Select Confirm (√). 3. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. If no password was defined for the schemas. The project listing displays. 2. and key in a project name. 3. For information about schema passwords. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. EE Environment 41 . if needed._ _______________ Steps 1. leave these fields blank. see RIS Schema Manager. and key in the password. Select a project from the listing area. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. You can make modifications to these fields. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields.

) 42 . In this example. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. only the EE Raceway product is on menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. Steps 1. The Design Menu displays. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation. available for use.

Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. and key in the new project name._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. 2. this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. and key in a project to be copied. 43 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. EE Environment Steps 1. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. 3. Select the Copy project to input field. 4. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). 3. Select a project to be copied from the listing area.

If a database exists in the project directory. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project. Steps 1. 2. Select Confirm (√). Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. 44 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select the Project name field. and key in the project name. 3. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted.February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. Select the project name from the listing area.

If a database does not exist in the project directory. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. 3. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. For information about dropping a schema. see RIS Schema Manager. a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. 45 . EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project. page 553 .

Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. 46 . Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project. The path must exist on the remote node. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. The project name is appended to this path. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

user name. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. Select the Project name from the scrolling area.) When archiving using a floppy disk. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Select the storage facility for your project files. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s . — OR — Select the Project name field. Archive 3. contact your system administrator._ _______________ Steps 1. EE Environment 47 . Default values for the remote node name. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. (If you need more information about the . EE_USERNAME. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. 3.EErc file. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. 4.EErc file. and EE_REMDIR. 2. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. and key in a project name.

When restoring from a network. When restoring from a floppy. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. 48 . The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. A password is required if you use the TCP option.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin.

Select the Project name field. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. 2. Indicate the storage location for your project._ _______________ Steps 1. Select Restore from the Project Menu. EE Environment 49 . Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. and key in a project name. 4. you must have the disk in the disk drive. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Restore 3. 3. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. When restoring from a floppy disk.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes. RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 . The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections.

2. see RIS Schema Manager. With this utility you can create. Steps 1. RIS Schema Manager. Before using this utility. page 553 . RIS schema utilities 3. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. For more information. you must have an existing database and user name. drop. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. 51 . and maintain project and reference database schemas. To access the RIS Schema Manager form.

select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input. Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. set the toggle to Echo. You can update the schema with multiple products. To display the schema password input. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. To enter the schema name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For additional information about updating schemas.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. page 425 . see EE Databases. To enter the password. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. 52 . select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. Schema password — Defines the schema password. if one exists. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. though doing so will slow processing time. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options.

Update Project Schema Steps 3. When Update project schema finishes processing. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. 3. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. select the field.EErc file.. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. To change the displayed default files. 53 . Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. see Process. Background. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. For more information about operating modes.. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. 4. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). You can redefine the defaults by editing this .msg). and key in the full pathname for those files. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files.EErc file. Set up the form to meet your specifications. and key in the desired filenames. The Update project schema form displays: 2. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. EE Environment 1. or Batch.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Return to step 1. page 64 ._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. The update process displays the message Processing .

5. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. the system displays an error message file (create_db.err). using the Output option on the Utilities form. page 89 . You can also access these message files. For more information.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form. 6. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. see Output. 54 .

Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. Background. page 64 . For additional information about updating schemas._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. To enter information. EE Environment 55 . if one exists. select the field. see Process. 3. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . or Batch. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. To display the schema password input. and key in the desired filenames.EErc file. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. set the toggle to Echo. though doing so will slow processing time. select the field. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. page 425 . To enter information. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. Schema password — Define the schema password. select the field. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\.EErc file. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). and key in the full pathname for those files. You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. For more information about operating modes. To change the displayed default files. You can update the schema with multiple products. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. see EE Databases.

err). 3. — OR — — If errors occur during the update process.. 56 .February 2003 Steps 1. Set up the form to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. Return to step 1. it will display one of two message files..msg). 4. 2. The update process displays the message Processing . — If the schema is updated without errors. When Update reference schema finishes processing. Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. The Update reference schema form displays. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the system displays a processing message file (create_db. the system displays an error message file (create_db.

_ _______________

Update Reference Schema

You can also access these message files, located in the current project’s /tmp directory, using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information, see Output, page 89 . 5. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.

3. EE Environment

57

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

58

_ _______________
4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment
When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu, one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu, if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu, page 42 for more information). — OR —

Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment

The EE Raceway Design Menu.

4. EERWAY Environment

The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. If you are a new user, you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options.

Commands
The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. Create — Allows you to create a design file.

59

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design, rule, report, and message files.

60

_ _______________
Create
This option creates design files, based on a specified seed file.

Create

When you create a drawing, you are actually copying a seed file (a template). The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed.dgn) and English seed file (seed.dgn). You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment.

4. EERWAY Environment

Steps
1. Select Create from the Design Menu. If there is only one seed file, it is displayed as the default. If there is more than one seed file available, the listing area displays all these files. By default, the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. 2. Select the seed file. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. 3. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and, optionally, a file extension.

61

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 A file extension of .dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension. 4. Select Confirm (√). The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.

62

_ _______________
Design
This option accesses the graphics environment, taking you into a specified existing design file.

Design

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Design from the Design Menu. Select the drawing name from the listing area. Select Confirm (√). The system invokes the graphics environment. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process.

4. EERWAY Environment

63

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Process
This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database.

Overview
This section provides general information about running all processes. See Raceway Processes, page 331 for more information about individual processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.

64

_ _______________
When you enter a specific process, an input screen displays.

Process

You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. You can override default values by keying in your own information. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. An asterisk (*), when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field, is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. For example, if you enter a*, all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to execute the process.

Operating Modes
The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. The default mode is Foreground, but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. A process in Foreground runs immediately, and you do not regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. A process in Background runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

4. EERWAY Environment

65

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Entering Time in Batch Mode
If you select Batch mode, an input box displays, allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. The time can be entered as 1, 2 or 4 digits. One- and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours, four digits to be hours and minutes. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The suffix AM or PM may be appended; otherwise, a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The system also recognizes the names NOON, MIDNIGHT, NOW and NEXT. Optionally, you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. If you input no date, the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour, and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. Legitimate commands include:

0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Process from the Design Menu. Select a process from the listing area. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option.

66

_ _______________
EDEN
The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden.dat file.

EDEN

Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights, fittings, and special parts.

This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. For detailed information about individual Eden options, see Eden Processes, page 347 .

4. EERWAY Environment

67

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)), an input screen displays.

You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. If necessary, you can override the default values that already display, and key in your own information. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to begin the option process.

Operating Modes
A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. The default mode is foreground. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground, background, and batch. An option in foreground mode runs immediately, and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. An option in background mode runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

68

The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). If you input no date. 2 or 4 digits. MIDNIGHT. EERWAY Environment 69 . a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). an input box displays. it will run the job TOMORROW. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. One. NOW and NEXT are also recognized. it will run the job TODAY. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. four digits to be hours and minutes. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. The special names NOON.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. otherwise.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat file (win32app\eerway\data). You must load the project database before running any reports. 70 .February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. See Reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.

Steps 1. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option. the new file will overwrite that file. You can change the name of the output file or error file. To change the output filename. EERWAY Environment 71 ._ _______________ When you process a report.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. Select a report from the listing area. 4. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. you should name the output files yourself. an input screen displays. 3. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. select the output file box and key in a new name. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. Select Report from the Design Menu. 2.

72 . These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. For instance. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction.

For more detailed information about each rule check. 4. page 545 . see Reports. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. You must load the project database before running any rule checks._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks. EERWAY Environment 73 .

If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. an input screen displays. you should name the output files yourself. 74 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. the new file will destroy the previously created file. or change that information according to your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Steps 1. Select a rule check report from the listing area. 2. Select Rule from the Design Menu. The name of the rule check report displays at the top.February 2003 When you process a rule check. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. 3. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. If you want to save reports throughout a project.

All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns. 75 . the Drawing Utility Menu displays._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. 4. Each column will list a different subdirectory.

tmp) .February 2003 Drawing (.All report files generated by rule checks reports. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. 3.dgn) . Copy — Copies a file. Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging).chk) . Enter necessary form information for the active option. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (. Receive — Receives a file from a network node. (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (. and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option. Output — Outputs a file to a printer.All drawings. Select Utilities from the Design Menu. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types. or plotter._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .rpt) . Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file. Steps 1.All report files generated by standard reports. (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). Rename — Renames a file. screen. and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports.All files output by Raceway processes. Send — Sends a file to a network node. 2. 76 .

Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option._ _______________ 4. EERWAY Environment 77 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option. Utilities 4.

78 . Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied.dgn. You must specify a unique filename for the destination file. . Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called. elect a file from the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file. key in a unique destination file name into this field. or key in the name of the file to be copied. and so forth) to the new file.rpt.

Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them. you must select the Purge option. 4. EERWAY Environment 79 . but can be undeleted (that is. To physically remove the file from the workstation.

80 .February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you cannot undelete them with this option. Once you have removed files using Purge.

Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. or no files at all._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. place a data point on it. selected files that have been deleted. 4. To de-select a selected file. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. EERWAY Environment 81 . you cannot recover it. Once you Purge a file. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them.

Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file.dgn. .February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can select the file from the list. and so forth) to the new filename.rpt. Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename. It does not automatically append a file extension (. or key the name into this field. 82 .

Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. EERWAY Environment 83 . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. You can either select the desired file from the list. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. the setting should be No IGDS. Otherwise. 4. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. turn on the IGDS toggle.dgn). Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system. test1. or key in the appropriate name. The password may or may not be visible in the field._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node.

Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. 84 . Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or key in the appropriate name. Be sure to specify the complete filename. The password may or may not be visible in the field. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. Also. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. specify the local path to the file. including its extension. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving. You can either select the desired file from the list.

chk. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received. Receive 4._ _______________ Local path (dgn. rpt. EERWAY Environment 85 .

TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 86 . page 46 . Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. see the description of Archive in Archive.

Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. 87 . Restore Field Descriptions 4. page 48 . see the description of Restore in Restore. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field.

depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine. 88 . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field.

for example – are not allowed. screen. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer. plotter. If you do not specify an output destination. 89 . or laser printer._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. IPLOT commands. or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. Local commands. or select it from the list. Field Descriptions 4. NQS options.dat) controls the available output options. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 90 .

It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. By default. the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document._ _______________ 5. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. data button <D>. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. 5. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. EERWAY Graphics 91 .

Initializes RIS with the reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen. page 63 ).February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views. 92 .

your screen display may be different. To select an action. 93 ._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5.cmds file. When the correct item highlights. release the data button. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window.displays a list of window actions. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. as described in the previous section. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button .) 1. MicroStation Command Window .

February 2003 — Sink Box . — Current Command Field . — Key-In Field . Command Menu Bar .displays elements as you place them. 4. — System Prompt Field . 3.displays startup file information and product name.contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design.displays the name of the current active command. 94 .moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type. 2. Working Area .displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard. The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. All your design work occurs in the screen working area. Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes.displays a system prompt that directs you through a command. — Command Status Field . Windows .

_ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor. When the correct item highlights. the window is restored to its previous size and location. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. EERWAY Graphics 95 . If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size. Press and hold the data button to move the window. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window.collapses a window. Diagonal Arrows . If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer.appear when the cursor is placed over the window border. Resize Borders . Move Arrows .provide ways to move and resize windows. release the data button. Close . Lower . Size .appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border. Maximize .displays a list of window actions. Window Menu Button .enlarges a window to its maximum size. the window is restored to its previous size and location.provide ways to manipulate windows.moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy.appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border.collapses a window. Move .restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location.enlarges a window to its maximum size.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners. Screen Display 5.moves a window around the workspace. Horizontal Arrows . Restore . To select an action from the menu.deletes a window. Vertical Arrows . press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. Minimize . Maximize Button . Minimize Button .

Removes all palettes that have been invoked.Invokes the Bar Commands palette. Remove Palettes . Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword. Compress Design . For instance. place the cursor over the button and press <D>. Bar Commands . 96 . selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu.February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window.Executes the File Design command. and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface. To select a keyword. Exit . Integrated Commands . Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands.Invokes the Integrated Commands menu.Invokes the EERWAY command palette. which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette . when applicable.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command. you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks.

EERWAY Graphics 97 . then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. 5. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment.

February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. 98 . then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. EERWAY Graphics 99 . then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. 5._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Palette. 100 . Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify Group Commands.February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. 5._ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. EERWAY Graphics 101 .

then selecting Palette. Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window. 102 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the wrong element may highlight. line. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. When you are moving an element._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. place a data point on it. The system highlights the element. In many commands. EERWAY Graphics 103 . For example. If the wrong element highlights. Identifying Elements 5. The system then highlights another element. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. press <D> again to accept the element. To identify an element. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. If the correct element highlights. or shape you place is called an element. press <R> to reject that element.

called MU:SU:PU.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. You may set your working units to any desired value. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design. 1 foot) SU — Subunit. you can often use data points. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points.) 104 . You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins. Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. the working units of measurement. are established based on the project type (metric or English). also known as MU:SU:PU. Subunits. you are not limited to using only them. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. If using this cell library. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Therefore. and Positional Units. if a user-created cell library is being used.

1:6. There are several ways to key in precision points. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. 105 . The new point is placed relative to the previous point. as described below: DI=(distance.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :. For example. For example._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in DI=0:10. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point. 5. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. key in DX=1:6.0. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard. direction) To place a precision point.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 106 .

creating a raceway model. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible._ _______________ 6. page 415 . and running reports and processes on the file. Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. This includes setting up the design file. as an operator would typically use it. Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6. This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. 107 . Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software.

Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). On the right are the same elements after propagation. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left.February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. In general. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 . This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process. EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways.

You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command). Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. for example). specifications._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. For additional system manager information. Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes. 109 . see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts.

See Set Active System. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. page 264 for more information. You can change the active system throughout the design session. page 295 for more information. page 260 for more information. page 262 for more information. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. See Define One-Line Type. See Set Symbology Control. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. Then. 110 . If you need one-line types that are not available to you. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. page 294 for more information. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. See Set Active One-Line Type. page 258 for more information. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. If you need systems not available to you. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. See Symbology Control.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. The command displays all systems available in the reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. See Define System. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. you can change the default symbology settings for them. Then.

page 297 for more information. you should review the active propagation parameters. 111 . and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines. Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 289 for more information. See Propagation Setup. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. As you place one-line segments. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. what one-lines will be propagated.

Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways). page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . initially in phantom mode. page 132 . you can continue placing one-lines. and the Precision Input form. page 147 . it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. The following figure displays the parts of a run. regardless of type. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. and Precision Input Form. a phantom run disappears. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. To draw a raceway. See Place One-Line. Once you place and accept a run. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. See Design Commands. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. If not accepted. Place Manual Fitting. placing tentative segments. 112 . When you accept the run.February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. page 119 for more information on these commands.

When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. use the Propagate command. unusual angles. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. Sketch: In sketch mode. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. Second. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. For example. First. so reference database access is not required. If you require mitred elbows for production. Propagation 6. All special fittings (conduit bodies. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. pullboxes. For example. Once found. Eden: In Eden mode. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. page 147 for more information. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. see Place Manual Fitting. 113 . It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. or fitting-to-fitting placement. you can define the fitting through Eden. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. extension. page 194 for more information. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. for example). For example. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. see Propagate Element. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. and light fixtures) must be placed manually.

and specification. page 314 . Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. For a detailed description of these error messages. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. see Error Messages. definition. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. page 377 . To highlight errors that occur during propagation. thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). the propagation mode must be set to sketch._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. the one-line elements remain in the design file. see Highlight Propagation Errors. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. regardless of the active propagation mode.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. 114 .

one-lines. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. three-lines. one-lines.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. The project database is normally created when the project is created. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. For title blocks. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. three-lines. page 178 ). (The system manager may customize these values. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. and title blocks. Once the project database is loaded. Databases 6. supplied by the reference database. and title blocks. The default annotation information. For the purposes of this discussion. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. using the annotation forms. three-lines. one-lines. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. the default can be unique for each title block cell. 115 . Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs.

A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 116 .) are stored. etc. a distinction is now made between schema and database. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product. three-lines. The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines.

_ _______________ Reports Reports 6. Workflow Currently. These reports run on the project and reference databases. page 545 . For more detailed information about the individual reports. see Reports. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. page 59 for general information about running reports. You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. 117 .

the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 118 . This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process. You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. However. See Create Interference Envelope (default name).February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software.

This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. For each command. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. Specify an absolute coordinate to move. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences._ _______________ 7. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. See System/Application Manager Information. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. When you select a command from the menu. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. Precision Input Form 7. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. the form displays the active command name as its title. 119 . The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt.

To change the displayed working view. In most cases. 120 . The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. while collapsing the precision input form. You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It can also reset a current command action by one step.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. select the field. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>. Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt. In most cases. Cancel Terminates the active command. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays.

The bottom field displays various precision input messages. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. Using Move To. and direction. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. Using Move. For example. Both options accept key-in for distance. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. For example. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. 7. by selecting North and keying in 20. by selecting North and keying in 20._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. 121 .

Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement.February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. By using the justification point and the height and width option described below. and lower right. Three justification points are available: lower left. lower center. 122 . you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. When you select the command. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. 3. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. 7. Precision Input 123 ._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. Activate the Any Point option. you can route segments nonorthogonally. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. If you do select Accept. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. In Construct Point mode. 2. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. When you identify a one-line. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. The command highlights the identified segment.

— OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. and select Accept. — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint.February 2003 4. 124 . moving in the direction of the segment. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. 5. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. the command still calculates the point from the endpoint. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2.

The distance displays at the bottom of the form. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. the Full/Half toggle displays. When you select the command. Precision Input 125 . 7. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. When you select the Distance button. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. When you select the Height or Width buttons. Using the toggle. Using the toggle. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. When you select the Height or Width buttons. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. When you select the Distance button. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification). The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. the Full/Half toggle displays. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. You cannot use this command to place a first point. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. or any distance you key in.

You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form.February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Angles . You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. Move .These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined. Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance . You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . The Distance and Direction form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Move to . Steps 1. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. 2.These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. Negative values are acceptable. 126 . 3.Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees.

Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. If clockwise. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees). See Runtime Setup Commands. 7. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. modify. page 287 for more information on the available commands. 127 . The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. This option is set in the PDS product. The default setting is clockwise._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. If counterclockwise. 4.

February 2003 128 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and right cylinder. manual fittings. raceway connect points (RCPs)._ _______________ 8. circle. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. change the active design parameters. rotate cross sections. 8. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. and size conduit and duct banks. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. Design 129 . The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. drop points. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc.

February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line. 130 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment.

For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. 8. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. See Setup Commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. 131 . Likewise. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. page 119 . page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands.

One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. or specifications of a one-line. or when you place a fitting. raceway parameters. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. 132 . Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. based on every possible combination of routing options. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. and so forth). Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. and annotation of the original one-line. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. then connect will not be an option. you can connect to an existing one-line. one-line type. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. you can resume routing an existing one-line. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. unattached to another element.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. conduit. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can attach to an existing RCP. These two segments will retain the systems. is new.

Design 133 . the command will not allow the continue option._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. If the beginning or termination action is break. If the beginning or termination action is break. then the command places a new RCP by default. or continue. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. 8. attach. then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. or continue. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. attach. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. though it is not a recommended practice. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified.

134 . and return to step 2. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. In addition. 2. Complete the routing. and exit a command. reject input. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. Data Point Accepts. page 287 . reset a command action. accept input. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. page 119. prompting you to Enter first data point. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 3. Select the Place One-Line command. At any point during this operating sequence. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. you can locate elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Place One-Line precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1. route one-lines. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. page 256 ). See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. 4. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation.

or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. reset a command action. route one-lines. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. 8. circle. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. circle. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. At any point during this operating sequence. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. The arc. see Precision Input Form. such as an elbow. reject input. 135 . Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. accept input. If the RCP has a fitting on it. If the RCP does not have a fitting. or part of a cell. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points.

Select the Route Around Vessel command. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. 4. The precision input form displays. the closest._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. circle. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. the route can be placed to the vessel. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. 5.February 2003 Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. You cannot key in a negative value. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. 3. 136 . 2.

— OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. Route Around Vessel 8. Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value._ _______________ 6. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). 7. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. Design 137 . The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. 138 . At any point during this operating sequence. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. route one-lines. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. reset a command action. 2. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. the system displays the message Element not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Steps 1.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. you can locate elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system highlights a valid one-line.

the command inserts the RCP as specified. Continue inserting RCPs. Design 139 . Go to Step 2. — OR — Exit the command. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. If you accept the one-line. Insert RCP 8._ _______________ 3. 4. the system prompts you to identify another. Go to Step 2. — OR — If you reject the one-line.

2. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. go to step 4. you can locate elements. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. For duct bank cross sections. Using the form. accept input. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. reset a command action. If you identified a duct bank cross section. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exit a command. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. see Set Raceway Defaults._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Otherwise continue to step 3. 140 . route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. but changes the duct bank justification location. page 256 for more information.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.

4. 8. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. See Set Raceway Defaults. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. Repeat this step. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. If you do not locate an acceptable element. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. Data Point Accepts. If Automatic Propagation is on. 3._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. the system displays the message Element not found. Design 141 .

The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. Select the Place Drop Point command. The system highlights a valid RCP. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. reset a command action. a higher number indicates a lesser priority._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. route one-lines. you can locate elements. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. reject input. 2. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. Using the form. 142 . The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. for instance. At any point during this operating sequence. For example. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You can. If you do not locate an acceptable element. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. accept input. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file.

Place Drop Point 8. and returns you to the previous prompt. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. 5. The system places the drop point as specified. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. Go to step 2. The system highlights the identified one-line._ _______________ 3. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP. — OR — Reject the one-line. 4. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. Design 143 . The system prompts you to identify another RCP. Go to step 2. Go to step 4.

route one-lines. Steps 1. 3. Using the form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. accept input. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. and exit a command. 144 . Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. The system highlights a valid RCP._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. the system displays the message Element not found. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. 2. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. reject input. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

Select the Define Active Point command. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. and exits the command. Steps 8. The command makes the specified data point the active point. 145 . reset a command action. accept input. reject input. Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. 2. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. Design 1.

For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. you can locate elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and raceway parameters. Return to step 2. Select the Set Active Parameters command. 3. one-line type. active systems. and exit a command. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. system. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The system sets the active one-line type. see Precision Input Form. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1. 146 .February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. accept input. reset a command action. The command exits automatically. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. 2. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. The system highlights the identified element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. Place Manual Fitting 8. pullboxes. Design 147 . For example. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. unusual angles._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. When placing a straight section. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. then the system places the new fitting by itself. and so forth) using this command. vertical tees. During placement. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. or fitting-to-fitting placement. Otherwise. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP.

page 295 . page 294 . and active one-line type parameters in the design. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. page 145 . the previous orientation will be retained._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the displayed qualifier. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. inside vertical. 148 . See Set Active One-Line Type. etc. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. See Set Active System. Otherwise. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. the command derives the orientation from the place point. select a value from the list. See Define Active Point. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. select a value from the list.) for that specification. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. one-line type. wye. etc. etc. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. To change the displayed subtype.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. straight. See Set Active Parameters. To change the displayed three-line type. rigid. select a value from the list.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. horizontal. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. page 146 .

and key in the new value. Qualifier. Subtype. Doing so displays a specification form. Design 149 . Spec1. select an angle from the list or select the field._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. select the corresponding Display button. and Qualifier for the current specification. select a value from the list. key in a negative angle. or Angle (if applicable). if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. You can only review the values in this field. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. select a value from the list. If straight is not your active Type. Subtype. The list contains all available specifications. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. and Qualifier. and key in the new value. select the field. To change the displayed angle. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. To display the specification itself. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. 8. To change the displayed length. Part — Displays the active part. (if applicable) Spec2. Subtype. the Length field does not display on the form. To change the displayed part. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). The list contains available angles. To change the displayed specification.

and key in a new value. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. Select . You can only review the information in this column. for the given Spec1. If an * displays in the List column. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. see Annotate Element. Override . Type. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. the existing RCP location is fixed. if any. containing all matching rows. For a list of valid operators. Clear . and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. displays. You can review and modify the values in this column.February 2003 Column name .Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. select the Override button. If Cutback Mode is off.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R).Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. 150 .Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. To change a value. Then select the field. Doing so displays a specification form. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. If Cutback Mode is on. select the slide bar. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. If more than one row matches the criteria. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. then the column value has an associated codelist. If only one row matches this criteria. page 178 . Subtype.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. See Spec1 for a description of the form. Column value ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the active placepoint. and Qualifier. select the *. List . then a second form. the RCP will be moved accordingly. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. which automatically activates it. To display the codelist. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria.

and key in a new value. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. the Place Manual Fitting form displays. To change the displayed axis. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. select the field. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. 8. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Design 151 . To change the displayed angle. Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. then the largest fitting available is used. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. Secondary. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. Angle . About . select the field. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. then that fitting is used.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis.

type. if you set material to feraloy._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For example. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. regardless of the other attribute settings. material. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. select a table name from the list. size. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. and size to 1/2 inch. see the descriptions earlier in this section. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. you set the active Table to cond_body. Similarly. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. if you set type to form 7c. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. and vendor to 3. In other words. To change the active special part table. and vendor display as the active attributes. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. made of feraloy from vendor 3. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. material to feraloy. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. When set to All. will be displayed in the size list. vendor to 3. 152 .

height. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. 2. 3. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. see Precision Input Form. Change fitting descriptions. set the toggle to Driven By Table. 4. On the other hand. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Such fittings are called special parts. For more information.) to construct the three-line symbols. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. Design Steps 1. etc._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. you should first consider a few points. orientations. and location. orientation. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. page 119 . 153 . Go to step 4. radius. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8.

Continue placing manual fittings. 154 .February 2003 5. — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Design 155 . Conduit Sizing 8.

February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. the system assumes =. If an * displays in the column. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. To display the code list. select the *. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. 156 . This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. then the Value has an associated code list. This operator is a wild card. representing zero or more characters. This operator is a wild card. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. representing a single character. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. If you do not enter another operator.

Design 157 .The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. If more than one cable matches the search criteria. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units.When a conduit is calculated to be full. If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. the PseudoCable form displays. — Increase/Decrease size . Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. 8. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there. it is added to the conduit. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit.

See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. 4.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. Using the form. 158 . At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. Select the Conduit Sizing command. you can locate elements. page 268 for more information. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. 3. Define the cables for the conduit. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. Steps 1. reject input. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. accept input. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Design 159 . If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. Field Descriptions 8. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made. a warning message displays. Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit._ _______________ 5.

reject input. If Automatic Propagation is on. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. you can locate elements. page 119. 2. page 192 for more information. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Move One-Line Vertex._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. route one-lines. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. Using the form. The vertex is inserted. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 3. reset a command action. To move an inserted vertex. 160 . The selected one-line highlights. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. and exit a command.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. accept input. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line.

field route length. When on. To change the value. there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. 161 . To change the displayed length. select the field and key in a new length. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. select the field and key in the new value. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. the value is displayed in the design._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value.) When set to Keyin. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. For example. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. This field is informational only. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. Similarly. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field.

Secondary. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. To change the displayed axis. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. select the field. To change the displayed angle. route one-lines. sum of the x. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. and key in a new value. you are prompted for the first point (that is. y. page 119. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. select the field. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. select the field. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. At any point during this operating sequence. and key in a new value. placement point) of the one-line element. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. To change the displayed length. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. accept input. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. reset a command action. 162 .) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix.

Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. 2. Design 163 . Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. — OR — Exit the command. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. 3. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. The precision input form displays.

164 . cable or gap to a button. All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section. you assign that area in the duct bank. The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable. By assigning a conduit. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons.

The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). If conduit routing is selected. Design 165 . cable or gap to a matrix button. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. See Set Raceway Defaults. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. page 256 for more information. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. If cable routing is selected. 8.

Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. Steps 1. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. Define cross section layout using the various commands. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exit a command. Likewise. See Set Raceway Defaults. At any point during this operating sequence. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. If you select Cancel on the warning form. The duct bank section layout. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. page 119. reject input. you can locate elements. all conduit/cable information. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. is assigned to the duct one-line. 166 . you can define a margin width._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. 2. The precision input form displays. any changes you made will be ignored. 3. For detailed information about precision input. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. both width and height. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 256 for more information. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. reset a command action. Using the form. If Automatic Propagation is on. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 4.

Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. page 289 . page 260 . 167 . See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. See Define Duct Cross Section. You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. See Define One-Line Type. 8. page 294 . See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. units. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. See Set Active One-Line Type. page 164 . page 268 . vendor. You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example.

you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. 168 . This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up.February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection. conduit/cable) to manipulate. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model.

Go to Step 4. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The Place Stub Up form displays. Steps 8. 2. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Go to Step 6. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the option. Go to Step 2. Select the Place Stub Up command. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. 5. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. The identified element highlights._ _______________ Steps 1. Go to Step 9. 169 . 4. 3. Go to Step 14. — OR — Select the Change Association option. Select the Select Duct Segment option.

Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. annotation.February 2003 6. 170 . The identified element highlights. Go to Step 10. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 7. — OR — Exit the option. Select the Delete Stub Up option. The precision input form displays. 12. 10. Go to Step 7. — OR — Exit the option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. propagated elements. The precision input form displays. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select stub up for modification. 8. 11. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Go to Step 2. The identified element highlights. 9. is displays in the form message field. It also deletes all cross sections. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 7. Select the Change Association option.

Go to Step 2. Design Go to Step 14. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Go to Step 2. 171 . Go to Step 17. displays in the message field. The precision input form displays. 16. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. Steps 8. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. Select the Place Stub Up option. 13. Select a button from the Button Matrix._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. has been changed. displays in the message field. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 17. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. 14. Go to Step 2. Select location to place stub up. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. — OR — Select a option button. Select location to place stub up. 15. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. Stub up spec.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. Available element manipulations include copying. then selecting Palette. one-lines. and so forth). three-lines. annotating. annotation. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. and propagation._ _______________ 9. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. moving. such as RCPs. deleting. 9. 173 . and three-lines. within the design file. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements.

page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For reliable results. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. any time you are modifying raceway elements. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session. 174 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. For detailed information about precision input. you should use these commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. See Setup Commands. page 119 . see Precision Input Form.

Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. one-lines. to review or edit element annotation._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. annotation. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. copy. and three-lines. within the design file. You can use individual commands to move. Commands Annotate Element — Places. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. then selecting Palette. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. reviews. 175 . and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. three-lines. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. 9. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. and so forth). including RCPs. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. then selecting Modify Element Commands. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. and delete specified elements.

Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. and elements associated with it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. 176 . Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. from the design file.

see Precision Input Form. 9. page 119 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. 177 . page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). For reliable results. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. not MicroStation manipulation commands. and so forth). Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. three-lines. any time you are modifying raceway elements. See Setup Commands. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. annotation. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. you can use these commands throughout the design session. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. you should use these commands. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 178 . and fittings. reviews. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. Using this command. By definition. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. For straights and fittings. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. Raceway Connect Points (RCP).February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. straights. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. three-lines. you are allowed only to review the annotation.

however. To change the values associated with the element. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. If Dgn displays in the column. and key in the new value. You can review and modify the values in this field. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. select the *. then it will display an R. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. The key field is updated. If you change a column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Once you have deleted the override. If blanks exist for a field. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. You can enter blank spaces into the design. You can only review the information in this column. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. then the value derives from the design file. it becomes an override key to the reference database. Where the toggle is On. If an * displays in the List column. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. You can only review the Column name column information. The next time you enter the annotation form. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. where New had displayed. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. then the value derives from the reference database. the corresponding column value comes from user data. the Access column displays a R/W. Modify 179 . If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. Otherwise. 9. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. To display the codelist. When modified. If you can only view (read) the column value. using your keyboard space bar. the value is saved back to user data. the value will display in the design where you place it. select the field. Empty <Return>s. enter nothing into the design. the field remains null. If Ref displays in the column. Where UD displays in the column. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element.

You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. 180 . Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. which automatically activates it. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Otherwise. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. If you select Cancel (X). you can modify it. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. the field remains null. the Default key is used. You can only review the information in this field. Once you place an override key on an element. but cannot delete it. and key in a new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the field. select the row you want.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. If no key exists in the user element. To change the displayed value. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. and then select Confirm (√). If more than one row matches the criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. Available operators are described later in this section. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. the key specified in the user element is used. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form.

This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator is a wild card. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. If you do not enter another operator. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. page 119. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. 181 ._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. the system assumes =. Using the form. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. accept input. representing zero or more characters. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. reject input. For detailed information about precision input.

or RCP). Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. 6. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Position the column value. equipment pointer. 4. Select the Annotate Element command. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. reset <R> to skip. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications.February 2003 Steps 1. This step repeats for each new value. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. 3. The system highlights the specified element. The Annotate Element precision input form displays. Return to Step 2. drop point. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. Return to step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. three-line. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. 5. 182 . and place a data point. When there are no more values to place. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 2. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. The new value displays in the design file. return to Step 2. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The form displays all the current values associated with the element.

When you load the project database. Modify 183 . optionally. these values are loaded into the project database._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. displayed. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. Field Descriptions 9. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements. When you annotate any raceway element.

Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. and exit a command. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Precision Input Form. 184 . You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. route one-lines. reject input. accept input. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119.

Modify 185 . Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. Repeat this step._ _______________ Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Select the Copy Element command. 2. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. 9. The Copy Element precision input form displays. Return to Step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. Steps The system highlights the specified element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3.

All associated annotation. three-line fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If a one-line is moved. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. and equipment pointers will also be moved. At any point during this operating sequence. If an RCP is moved. and exit a command. accept input. All associated annotation. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. RCPs. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. and annotation. drop points. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. and equipment pointers will also be moved. equipment pointers. reset a command action. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. 186 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. You can use this command to move one-lines. three-line fittings.

3. 2. Steps The system highlights the specified element. Repeat this step. Modify 187 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The system moves the element to the specified location. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. the system displays the message Element not found. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. The Move Element precision input form displays._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. Return to Step 2. Select the Move Element command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 9.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. reset a command action.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. page 119. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. Using the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . accept input. 188 .

Select the Clone Element command. Steps 9. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. 2. Return to step 2. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. 4. If you are placing more than one clone. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy._ _______________ Steps 1. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Modify 189 . The element highlights. 3. 5.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. page 119. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. you can locate elements. reject input. Also. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the attached RCP will also move. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. route one-lines. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. 190 . accept input. see Precision Input Form. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment.

The selected one-line segment highlights. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. page 297 for more information on this toggle. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move. See Propagation Setup. 3._ _______________ Steps 1. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. 2. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. Repeat this step. Steps 9. The system moves the segment to the specified location. Modify 191 .

page 119. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. At any point during this operating sequence. If a one-line end vertex is moved. equipment pointers. also move with the vertex. The selected vertex highlights. Using the form. 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. the attached RCP. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. 192 . reset a command action. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. reject input. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. along with any annotation.

page 297 for more information on this toggle. Repeat this step._ _______________ 3. Move One-Line Vertex 9. See Propagation Setup. Modify 193 . — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on.

To view errors that occur during propagation. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Propagation Setup. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed. accept input. page 297 . reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. This command displays to the screen the pro. For information about the form.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). page 314 . which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. and exit a command. Using the form. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section.err file. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. see Highlight Propagation Errors. All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. 194 . You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form.

2. For information about this table. Go to step 2. — OR — Exit the command. 3. Go to step 1. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. Fittings 9. see Specification. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. The Project Run precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. the system displays the message Element not found. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 195 . page 507 ._ _______________ Steps 1. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. Select the Propagate Element command.

February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9. Modify 197 .

The list contains available angles. select a value from the list. page 214 . Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. etc.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. To change the displayed qualifier. select a value from the list. See Remove RCP. rigid. You can only review the values in this field. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. To change the displayed three-line type. inside vertical. select a value from the list. straight. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type.) for that specification. and key in the new value. horizontal. To change the displayed subtype. select an angle from the list or select the field. etc. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. 198 . etc. and Qualifier for the current specification. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. To change the displayed angle. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Subtype. wye.

Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. Part — Displays the active part. Then select the field. 199 . Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. 9. select a value from the list. and Qualifier. To change the displayed length. and (if applicable) Spec2._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). the Length field does not display on the form. Spec1. and key in a new value. select the Override button. To change the displayed specification. select the corresponding Display button. and key in the new value. To display the specification itself. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. key in a negative angle. Qualifier. Subtype. select the field. — Column value . You can also change any of the values for Type. The list contains all available specifications. Subtype. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. You can review and modify the values in this column. To change a value. If straight is not your active Type. To change the displayed part. You can only review the information in this column. select a value from the list.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type.

The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. and Qualifier. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. for the given Spec1. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. If only one row matches this criteria. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. — Select . If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. See Spec1 for a description of the form. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. page 178 . — Clear . To display the codelist. select the *. select the slide bar. Type. If an * displays in the List column. — Override . Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . then that fitting is used. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. then the column value has an associated codelist. To change the active placepoint. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes.February 2003 — List . see Annotate Element. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. which automatically activates it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If there is no fitting of that nominal size. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. For a list of valid operators. then the largest fitting available is used.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Subtype. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. If more than one row matches the criteria. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. if any. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. Doing so displays a specification form.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R).

type. To change the displayed angle. material to feraloy. you set the active Table to cond_body. and vendor to 3. To change the displayed axis. select a table name from the list. Secondary.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and vendor display as the active attributes. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. made of feraloy from vendor 3. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. if you set type to form 7c. In other words. material. and key in a new value. if you set material to feraloy. Modify 201 . the form changes. For example. 9. select the field. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. vendor to 3. and toggle between the three axes (Primary.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. select the field. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. — About . and size to 1/2 inch. To change the active special part table._ _______________ — Angle . size. Similarly. will be displayed in the size list. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key.

See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. see Precision Input Form. height. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. The list contains all available parts from the table. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. radius. etc. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. When set to All. you should first consider a few points. select a part from the list. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. For more information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the active part. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. Such fittings are called special parts. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. see the descriptions earlier in this section. regardless of the other attribute settings.) to construct the three-line symbols. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . page 119 .February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. On the other hand.

— OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify 203 . Edit the fitting as needed. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9._ _______________ Steps 1. 2. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. 3. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Go to step 4. 4. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Select Confirm when finished.

reset a command action. reject input. Using the form.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The system highlights a valid one-line. accept input. Select the Modify One-Line command. Steps 1. 204 . You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. the system displays the message Element not found. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. When identified. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The dashed segment will then be modified. 2. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. the other segment appears as a dashed line. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input.

Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. Modify One-Line 9. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. Go to step 2. 5. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. The one-line highlights._ _______________ 3. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. 6. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. To terminate the new routes. — OR — Reject the element. Repeat this step. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. Data Point Accepts. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. and return to step 2. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. Modify 205 . 4. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. place a data point on the original one-line. Go to step 2.

Accept the rotation and return to step 2. 206 . 7.February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Continue rotating the cross section.

then the largest fitting available is used. 207 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. reject input. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. See EE Databases._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. For example. see Precision Input Form. accept input. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. You must define the rules in the reference database. Place Fitting by Rule 9. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. reset a command action. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. you can locate elements. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. then that fitting is used. page 119. a LB fitting be placed.

displays. 2. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. 208 . Select the Place Fitting by Rule command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting.February 2003 Steps 1. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies.

Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. 9. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. If Invalid. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. All RCPs must have a system in common. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. Steps 1. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. If no coincident RCPs are found. then the RCPs can be merged. 209 . the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. If Combinable. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to.

You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status.February 2003 2. the one you selected. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. 3. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. changes to Kept. For each set of coincident RCPs. 210 . Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. The RCPs are combined. and the Status of the remaining RCP.

For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. Select Cancel when finished. 9. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. 5. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. If no duplicate one-lines are found. Modify 3. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. 2. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s)._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. 211 . 4. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other.

see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. 2. You can use this command to delete one-lines. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. The system highlights the specified element. drop points. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. cosmetic graphics. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reject input. 212 . Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. the system displays the message Element not found. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. and annotation. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). you can locate elements. equipment pointers. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Delete Element precision input form displays. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify 213 . Return to step 2. Return to Step 2. the system deletes it. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion. 3. propagated fittings. 9. annotation. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. It also deletes all cross sections. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element.

At any point during this operating sequence.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If both onelines are annotated. page 119. reject input. reset a command action. You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. Once such an RCP is removed. the two one-lines form a single one-line element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 214 . For detailed information about precision input. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. and exit a command. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems.

The Remove RCP precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. 2. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. If you accept the RCP. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. the system displays the message Element not found. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. If you reject the RCP. Select the Remove RCP command. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. the system prompts you to identify another. Remove RCP 9. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify 215 . 3. The system highlights the specified element. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP._ _______________ Steps 1.

to delete. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. This command does not remove the RCP. Select the Delete Fitting command. or the fitting’s RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. 216 . Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP.

accept input. Using the form. reset a command action. route one-lines. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Modify Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The selected vertex highlights. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 2._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. 217 . 9. Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. see Precision Input Form. reject input.

Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove.February 2003 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If Automatic Propagation is on. The vertex is removed. the one-line repropagates. Return to step 2. Return to step 2. 218 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. the command will repropagate the one-line. Modify 219 . you can locate elements. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. page 119. (See Propagation Setup. For detailed information about precision input. 9. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. If automatic propagation is toggled on. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. route one-lines.

Go to step 2. The system highlights a valid one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. 220 . The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. Go to step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. — OR — Reject the element. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). 2. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. the system displays the message Element not found. 3.February 2003 Steps 1.

Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. then the Project Rule can be assigned. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. To clear the Project Rule. 221 . The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. 9. When a row is selected. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. the system Percent and the Project Rule. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. select the *. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. Project Rules cannot be assigned. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. If an * displays in the List column. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. If the Project Rule Set is not defined._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system.

Using the form. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The identified element highlights. 5. Select the Change System Parameters command. you can locate elements. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. 3. — OR — Exit the command.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. reject input. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 4. page 119. 222 . and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections.

Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. and delete elements of specified groups. 223 . Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. reviews. and so forth). and to review or edit element annotation. annotation. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. then selecting Palette. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. copy. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. three-lines. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. Topics 9.

224 .February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. any time you are modifying raceway elements. you should use these commands. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. annotation. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 119 . 225 . because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. For detailed information about precision input. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. three-lines. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. For reliable results. and so forth). you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. See Setup Commands. see Precision Input Form. 9.

Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. The active group is highlighted in the list. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. however. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. using the Hilite option. To change the active group. 226 . The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. select the group name key-in field. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. and key in a name. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. If the toggle is set to Single Element. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. In general. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. select a group from the list. To enter a group name. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation.

The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. To initiate the Copy action. and all annotation. drop points. RCPs. adding elements to. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. It is not necessary to select Accept. When processing is complete. and then select Accept. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. To initiate the Drop operation._ _______________ To initiate the Create operation. select Drop from. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. To initiate the Hilite action. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. Define Group To initiate the Add to operation. three-lines. select Drop. and then select Accept. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. and select Accept. When processing is complete. You must choose at least one element type when creating. When processing is complete. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. If you remove all elements from a group. and key in a new group name. select a group from the Available Groups list. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. select Copy. the system automatically drops the entire group. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. Types include one-lines. select Add to. to equipment. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. select the button. To initiate the Drop from action. key in a group name. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. and then select Accept. or dropping elements from a group. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. 9. and select Hilite. Modify 227 .

EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. only those element types (RCPs. or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). – System . you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. one-lines. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems.Displays a list of available one-line types.Displays a list of available systems.Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes. When you select a system from this list. – Attributes . and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. 228 . or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. three-lines. three-lines. Once you have displayed the System list.February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. When you select a one-line type from this list. – One-Line Type . You can select individual systems from this list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. only those element types (RCPs. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. onelines. You can select individual one-line types from this list. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list.

insertion into groups.Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design. an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. or deletion from groups. Define Group Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements.Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. For example. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. – Fence Shape . the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. – Selection . 9._ _______________ When you select an element type from this list. – Fence Block . select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form. Once you have defined the attributes. and select Fence Block from this list. select the Accept button on the main form. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation. – View . Modify 229 . if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group. – All Elements . To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes.Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify.

— Select the Create button under Group Operations.February 2003 Steps 1. select your elements for the group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select one of the group modification commands. The Groups form displays. — OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. EE Method. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form. 4. and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. Select the Define Group command. 230 . Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. — Using the Graphic Method you defined. — Use the EE Element Types. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. 2. The group is created.

go to step 3. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. page 119. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. 9. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. reject input. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. 2. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Copy Element by Group This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. Steps 1. Modify The Copy by Group precision input form displays. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu. the message No active group defined displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — If you have a fence in the design. and exit a command. go to step 4. 231 . page 226. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. You must define a temporary group of elements. reset a command action. If you have not defined a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Copy Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. see Define Group. using the Define Group command. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines.

Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. 5. the command exits automatically. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying.February 2003 3. The command exits automatically. 6. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Otherwise. the command exits automatically. Otherwise. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the element you are copying._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. you are returned to step 3. Elements within the active group highlight. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. If there are group elements that remain uncopied. Otherwise. the command exits automatically. The system copies the element as specified. 232 . — OR — Reject the active group. Repeat this step.

reviews. You can only review the Column name column information. select the column value field and delete the blank character. using your keyboard space bar. Using this command. three-lines. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. You can review and modify the values in this field. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. You can enter blank spaces into the design. however. Once you have deleted the override. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. 233 . Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Annotate Element by Group 9. enter nothing into the design. and fittings. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database._ _______________ Annotate Element by Group This command places. Modify Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. Otherwise. the field remains null. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). and key in the new value. straights. To change the values associated with the element. select the field. Empty <Return>s. For straights and fittings. you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access).

When modified. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. the Default key is used. but cannot delete it. select the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database.February 2003 If blanks exist for a field. You can only review the information in this field. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If you can only view (read) the column value. select the *. If you delete the value in this field. the Access column displays a R/W. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. the field remains null. the key specified in the user element is used. Where UD displays in the column. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. If an * displays in the List column. it becomes an override key to the reference database. then it will display an R. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. If no key exists in the user element. Where the toggle is On. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. then the value has been defined from the design file. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If Ref displays in the column. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. Otherwise. and key in a new value. The next time you enter the annotation form. where New had displayed. Once you place an override key on an element. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. The key field is updated. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. To display the codelist. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. the value is saved back to user data. If you change a column value. you can modify it. 234 . If Dgn displays in the column. then the value derives from the reference database. To change the displayed value. the corresponding column value comes from user data. the value will display in the design where you place it. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. You can only review the information in this column.

The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. and then select Confirm (√). Annotate Element by Group From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. which automatically activates it. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. If more than one row matches the criteria. If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. 9. setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. Available operators are described later in this section._ _______________ Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. For example. If you select Cancel (X). If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. Modify 235 . Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then a second form containing all matching rows displays. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. select the row you want. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form.

236 . This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. you can locate elements. If you do not enter another operator. Using the form. You must define a temporary group of elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. A fence group overrides the active group. page 226 . reject input. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. the system assumes =. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This operator is a wild card. (For information about the command. using the Define Group command. page 119. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. representing zero or more characters. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input.) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. and exit a command.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. representing a single character. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. see Define Group. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action.

go to step 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. The system highlights the group contents. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. 237 . 6. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. 5. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. If no group elements remain. — If you have a fence in the design. 3. The system highlights another group element. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. Go to step 1. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. Repeat this step. 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Modify Reject the highlighted group element. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — OR — Annotate Element by Group 9. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. the command exits. — If there is not a fence in the design._ _______________ Steps 1. Go to Step 3. reset <R> to skip. The command exits automatically. go to step 2.

When there are no more values to place for the element type. the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and. If you set the toggle to Global. displayed. the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. Go to step 3. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single. Go to step 3.February 2003 Position the column value. When you load the project database. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. 238 . these values are loaded into the project database. optionally._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

go to step 4. using the Define Group command. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. Steps 1. the message No active group defined displays. useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. You must define a temporary group of elements. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and exit a command. Modify The Clone Group precision input form displays. Using the form._ _______________ Clone Element by Group This command copies the active group multiple times. page 119. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. go to step 3. you can locate elements. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. 2. 239 . A fence group overrides the active group. Clone Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 9. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. reject input. Select the Clone Group command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. — If you have a fence in the design. see Define Group. If you have not defined a group. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 226.

The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. — OR — Reject the active group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 6. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 4. Repeat this step. If you are placing more than one clone. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. 240 . — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The command exits automatically. Return to step 2. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. 7. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. the command exits automatically. 5. 8. Go to step 6. Otherwise. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies.February 2003 3.

see Highlight Propagation Errors. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). page 314 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 9. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. go to step 2. route one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. page 194 . — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. This command displays to the screen the pro. and exit a command. — If you have a fence in the design. page 119. using the Define Group command. go to step 4. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. A fence group overrides the active group. page 226. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. see Precision Input Form. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. accept input. see Define Group. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. The Project by Group precision input form displays. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. go to step 3. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Using the form. see Propagation Setup. see Propagate Element. Modify Steps 1.err file. You must define a temporary group of elements. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. For information about using this command. 241 . To view errors that occur during propagation. page 297 . For information about the form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command.

If no group elements remain for propagation. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. the command exits automatically. 3.February 2003 2. or until you exit the command. The system propagates every element belonging to the group. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. The system highlights another group element for propagation. The system propagates the element. — OR — Reject the active group. Go to step 1. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and then highlights another group element for propagation. go to step 3. or until you exit the command. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. 242 . — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and exits automatically. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. If no group elements remain. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The command exits automatically.

At any point during this operating sequence. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. using the Define Group command. You must define the rules in the reference database. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. then that fitting is used. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. then the largest fitting available is used. see Precision Input Form. see Define Group. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. route one-lines. 9. For example. See EE Databases. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. 243 . and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. reset a command action. page 226. A fence group overrides the active group. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. Using the form. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size.

4. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 4. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. go to step 2. the message No active group defined displays. the command exits automatically. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If you have not defined a group. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. 3. displays. The command exits automatically. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. 244 . Repeat this step.February 2003 Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. — If you have a fence in the design. 2. — OR — Reject the active group. go to step 3. Otherwise.

page 226 . 3. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. Select the Add Systems Group command. it will not be duplicated. Steps 1. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. see Define Group. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. For example. The system(s) is added. Modify 245 . The Add Systems form displays. the system defined at placement. It will only append systems to the element. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. This command will not change the master system. 9. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. 2. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group.

Systems — Displays all the available systems. While this button is depressed. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. that is. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. 246 . The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. the subsystem are all unselected. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. When a new active system is selected. Project Rules cannot be assigned. For example.

select the *. Modify 2. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. The active group is changed to the new system type. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. The active group to be changed highlights. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. Steps 1. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. To clear the Project Rule. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. Press <D> to accept the group. If an * displays in the List column. When defining the group for this command. page 226 . Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. one-lines._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. drop points. see Define Group. 9. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. The Replace Systems form displays. 247 . and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). When a row is selected. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. then the Project Rule can be assigned.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. using the Define Group command. you can locate elements. A fence group overrides the active group. If automatic propagation is toggled on. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. Using the form. reset a command action. 248 . page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. reject input. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). route one-lines. page 119._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 226. (See Propagation Setup.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence. see Define Group. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. You must define a temporary group of elements.

— If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . Repeat this step. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. — If you have a fence in the design. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Modify 3. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 4. The command exits automatically. Repeat this step. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. if any remain. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Go to step 3. and the command exits automatically._ _______________ Steps 1. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. the command exits automatically. go to step 4. 9. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. the command exits automatically. 2. go to step 3.

The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group. The command exits automatically.February 2003 Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the active group. 250 . The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

go to step 3. 9. go to step 4. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. Go to step 3. If you have not defined a group. using the Define Group command. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. At any point during this operating sequence. 2. 251 . page 226. see Define Group. You must define a temporary group of elements. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and the command exits automatically. the contents of the group are deleted. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Steps 1. see Precision Input Form. accept input. page 119. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. reset a command action. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. route one-lines. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. the message No active group defined displays. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. Using the form. go to step 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. you can locate elements.

The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. 252 . — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system deletes the element. — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically.February 2003 The command exits automatically. 4. the command exits automatically. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. and prompts you to delete another group element. 3. The system deletes all valid elements within the group. Repeat this step. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. the command exits automatically.

reviews. model annotation. review. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. Setup 253 . Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. and modifies the default parameters for text. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Set Text Defaults — Defines. and engineering units. RCPs. one-line types. and cross sections. text nodes. working view. systems. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. and modify the default parameters. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. report IDs. reviews. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command._ _______________ 10. reviews. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Symbology Control — Defines. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. 10. Setup Commands In a new design file. and symbology settings for your design file. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 254 .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file.

you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands. For individual command prerequisites. Setup 255 . Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control). Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. see the appropriate command descriptions._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. 10.

You can review. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. 256 . including cross section parameters. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. To change a displayed value. select the field. define. symbol defaults. select the field. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. and key in a new value. and/or modify the settings. page 164 for more information. between the routed cable/conduit.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. select the field. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change a displayed value. such as Color or Active Angle. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. and key in a new value. see Define Duct Cross Section. and modifies raceway defaults. You can review. and key in a new value. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. You can review. define. page 164 for more information. existing systems. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. To change a displayed value. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. Margin Width — Defines the distance. and/or modify the values in these fields. in sub-units. represented by the matrix buttons. reviews. define. see Define Duct Cross Section.

You can review. define. equipment pointer. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. and drop point annotation. You can review. The scale includes views 1 through 8. and key in a new value. and/or modify this key. 10. 3. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). Additionally. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. To change the current working view. To change a displayed value. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. select the field. define. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. To change the displayed value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. and key in a new value. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. Setup 257 . select first the key field and then the Display button. or drop point). You can only view this data. and/or modify the value in this field. 2. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. select the field. select the slide bar. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. equipment pointer._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points.

select the Select All button. as well as those already selected for the current design file. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. Select the Define System command. To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file.February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. Steps 1. The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. 258 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . In order to place one-lines. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. select the Clear All button. 2. so as to avoid duplication of elements. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. If you need systems not available to you. The System Definition form displays. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database.

Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Setup 259 . Define System 10.

To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. so as to avoid duplication of elements. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. select the Select All button. select the Clear All button. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). Select the Define One-Line Type command. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. If you need one-line types not available to you. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. as well as those already selected for the current design file. 260 . The One Line Type Definition form displays. 2. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database.

Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 10. Setup 261 ._ _______________ 3.

Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. Therefore. When you enter a new design file. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. page 260 . page 264 . all symbology is taken from the system defaults. to make any changes in symbology._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For more information. see Define System. The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. 262 . The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). see Symbology Control.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. page 258 and Define One-Line Type. For more information. you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. those oneline types will use a system default.

The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. Setup 263 . The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. Select the Set Symbology Control command. select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. 2. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. 3._ _______________ Steps 1. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. Using your cursor. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. 10. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). select the No Overrides button.

select another system from the list. select another one-line type from the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. reviews. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. or select the field. and key in a system name. To change the displayed system. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. and key in a new value. or select the field. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. To change a value in the list. page 262 for more information about this command). 264 . The display list contains a list of available systems. and key in the new value. You can review and edit these settings. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. select the field.

Symbology Control 10. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Setup 265 . The Symbology Control form displays._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Symbology Control command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). or select a value from the list. 266 . select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). and engineering units. You will enter all values using the Text form. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). To change the current text node justification. or select a value from the list.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. text nodes. To change the current text string justification. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text. reviews. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number.

You can only review the displayed settings. Set Text Defaults Steps 1._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. Sub units. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Select the Set Text Defaults command. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Setup 267 . 2. 10. The Text form displays.

February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. Define which attributes to use. Steps 1. 268 . 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays.

cel. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. Create Cell Commands 10. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. along with all existing cells. The cells you create using this command are stored. rway. copy it to a nonproduction directory. Setup 269 . This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. in your cell library. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. If you want to modify the delivered library. and modify the copied version._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models.

Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. To display a list of available cell libraries. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. see Precision Input Form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file. 270 . For detailed information about precision input. page 119 . You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands.

_ _______________
Create Model Cell
Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Create Model Cell

This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Model button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

10. Setup

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

271

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 10. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing sheet, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

272

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Model Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

273

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Create Equipment Pointer Cell
This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the To Equipment button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

274

_ _______________
6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

Create Equipment Pointer Cell

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing equipment tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip

10. Setup

For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

275

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

276

_ _______________
Create Drop Point Cell

Create Drop Point Cell

This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Drop Point button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point

10. Setup

Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. 5. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

277

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing drop point tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

278

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Drop Point Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

279

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Model Commands
These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file.

Commands
Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters, the defined systems, and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file.

Unlock Model — Unlocks the model.

Annotate Model — Adds, changes, or reviews the sheet name in a model.

280

_ _______________
Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands
You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. However, you can use these commands throughout the design session. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Using the Model Commands

Before Using These Commands
You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model, you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command.

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

10. Setup

281

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Lock Model
This command locks the model. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Therefore, you should lock your model after setup, but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Steps
1. Select the Lock Model command. The model is locked. If the model was locked when you selected this command, the message Model is already locked displays.

282

reject input. see Precision Input Form. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. Steps 1. Setup 283 . 10. Using the form. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. page 119. 2. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. route one-lines. — OR — Exit the command. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. Select the Move Model Annotation command. you can locate elements. and place it. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence.

you must first unlock the model using this command. 2. Steps 1.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model. Select the Unlock Model command. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model. 284 . A warning form displays.

however. Select the Annotate Model command. Steps 1. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. 4. Setup 285 . The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. 3. If you toggled Display to On. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. The Annotate Element form displays. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. will prevent such duplication. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. The Load Database process._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. 10. If you want to display the annotation in the model.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 286 .

287 . Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. modify. and allows you to set new active parameters. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu._ _______________ 11. based on the current active one-line type. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. Runtime Setup Commands 11. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Setup Commands. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types. 288 .

a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. page 294 ). You can enter blank spaces into the design. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Otherwise. You can only review the information in this field. select this field._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. Once you have deleted the override. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. You can review and modify the values in this field. Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. which is based on the current active one-line type. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. select the column value field and delete the blank character. To change the values associated with a one-line type. then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. the field remains null. and key in the new value. For example. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. If blanks exist for a field. 289 . Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory.

select the *. If you delete the value in this field. the value will display in the design where you place it. then it will display an R. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. Where the toggle is On. You can only review the information in this column. the field remains null. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. the Default key is used. You can only review the information in this field. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. but cannot delete it. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. and key in a new value. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. the Access column displays a R/W. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If an * displays in the List column. Once you place an override key on an element. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. The key field is updated. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. it becomes an override key to the reference database. select the field. the key specified in the user element is used. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. you can modify it. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. Otherwise._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. To display the codelist. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If you can only view (read) the column value. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. To change the displayed value. 290 . If no key exists in the user element.

Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. If more than one row matches the criteria. which automatically activates it. 291 . and then select Confirm (√). then a second form containing all matching rows displays._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. select the row you want. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). If you select Cancel (X).

292 .February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. the system assumes =. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. This operator is a wild card. This operator is a wild card. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. 3. representing a single character. representing zero or more characters. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. 2. If you do not enter another operator. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

optionally. Runtime 293 . these values are loaded into the project database. When you load the project database._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. displayed.

2. The Active One Line Type form displays. The one-line type you selected highlights. select the one-line type you want to make active. Steps 1. From the list. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. page 260 ). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. 294 . 3. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available. based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. the subsystems are all unselected. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. page 258 ). Using the Set Active System form. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. When a new active system is selected. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. whereas subsystems do not. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. While this button is depressed. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. you can select a new active system from the set of those available. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. 295 . This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. Set Active System 11. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Project Rules cannot be assigned. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type.

If an * displays. Select the Set Active System command. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. then a Project Rule can be assigned. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. press the Subsystem button. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. To clear the Project Rule. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. 2. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. 296 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The Active System form displays. Steps 1. When a row is selected. To access the list of subsystems. select the *. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. 4.

Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. 297 . regardless of the settings on this form.Propagates straight sections and fittings. Cutback . Eden . Sketch . and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. page 108 .Sketches standard straights and fittings. see The Drawing Process. Rough . Smooth . Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification.Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. radius. Propagation Setup 11.Propagates straight sections only. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. For additional information about propagation.Propagates straight sections. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it.

If you set the toggle to On. Select the Propagation Setup command. 298 . any changes you make to an element. automatic propagation is disabled. like editing the size. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. When the toggle is set to Off. Steps 1. 3. elements are automatically propagated when placed. Also. Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. part verification will be performed. The Propagation Setup form displays. regardless of the status of this toggle. 2.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. that affect the graphical display of the propagation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. or select the field. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. 299 . but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). their corresponding one-line types. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. and key in a new value. Set Active Levels 11. To change the active view. select a value from the list. and the levels on which they display._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. 1 . All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. When a level has its display turned on. the button appears to be depressed. select the appropriate level number. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. Runtime View — Displays the active view. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list.

Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 300 . The Levels form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. 2. Select the Set Active Levels command. 3.

Steps 1. Return to step 2. and coordinate location of ends and bends._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. location and radius of each bend in the run. then run information is displayed. 3. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. Display Element Information 11. Select the Display Element Information command. 301 . a straight section. or an RCP within a run is selected. 2. a fitting within a run. If either a one-line. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. This information includes: segment lengths. Return to step 2. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 302 .

In addition. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values._ _______________ 12. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. 303 . Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. sector/word position) you provide. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. Utilities Commands 12. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 304 . or shows the coordinate system currently active.February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file.

Group Workflow In general. you can use these commands throughout the design session. For detailed information about precision input. for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID. Utilities You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. for example). you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Using the Utilities Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. 305 . because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 119 . Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Using the Utilities Commands Before Using These Commands 12. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID. see Precision Input Form.

Press <R> to exit the command. select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. Steps 1.February 2003 Toggle Construction Display On/Off This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. the view number displays in a prompt. 306 . Once you have exited the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Therefore. 2. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. 3. When construction display is On.

_ _______________ Highlight Element by Sector/Word This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. 3. the element highlights. or 17 (text). Press <Esc> to exit. 7 (text node). 3 (line). If the position is valid. Steps 1. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. 4 (line string). Go to Step 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell). but is not added to a working set. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. Highlight Element by Sector/Word Highlight Sector/Word With Filename 12. 6 (shape). allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. 4. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. 2. and both are relative to 1. 307 . the entire complex element highlights. If you do not specify a pathname for the file. Utilities You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. The file will display in a form on the screen. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. If the element is part of a complex element.

Return to Step 1. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. 6. Return to Step 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. 7. Go to Step 6. 308 .) Go to Step 4.February 2003 5. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. After you select a line. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form.

For example. to see where propagation errors exist in your design file. 2. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command. but is not added to the working set. If you do not specify a pathname for a file. The file will display in a form on the screen. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. Highlight ASID ID With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. Utilities Steps 1. 309 . the raceway element highlights.err. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. The Select hilite asid mode form displays._ _______________ Highlight Element by ASID ID Highlight Element by ASID ID This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. 12. you can specify the file pro. If the ASID ID you specify is valid. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. 6. 5. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename. a file display form displays. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. 310 . Return to step 2. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. Go to step 6. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements.February 2003 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. Return to step 1. 4. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Return to step 2.

Utilities 8. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified.) Go to step 5. 12. Highlight Element by ASID ID After you select a line. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. Return to step 3._ _______________ Select a line that contains an ASID ID. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted. 9. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Go to step 8. Return to step 1. 7. Return to step 2. 311 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode.

Highlight Link With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. Go to Step 4. 4 (line string). the element highlights. 7 (text node). 2. 312 . — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. If you do not specify a pathname for the file. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values.February 2003 Highlight Element by Link This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. but is not added to a working set. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell). Steps 1. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. or 17 (text). If the entity and mslink are valid. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. 4. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. the entire complex element highlights. 6 (shape). If the element is part of a complex element. 3. 5. The file will display in a form on the screen. the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory. 3 (line). allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file.

Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. 313 . — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Go to Step 6._ _______________ After you select a line. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to Step 1. Point to view for window Highlight Element by Link 12.) Go to Step 4. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. Utilities Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. 6. 7. Return to Step 1.

and select Confirm (√).err file displays.err form redisplays.February 2003 Highlight Propagation Errors This command highlights propagation errors in the design file. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file. 314 . Go to step 2. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Continue highlighting propagation errors. Review the errors listed on the form. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors. select the error(s) from the list. 3. The pro. 2. and the pro. Steps 1.

Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for. 2. Utilities 315 . of an identified element._ _______________ Display Sector/Word Value This command displays the sector and word position. Select the Display Sector/Word command. Display Sector/Word Value Steps 1. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. and accept it with a <D>. 12.

Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . in the MicroStation command window. 2. Steps 1. of an identified element. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. 316 . — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command.February 2003 Display Element Type and ASID ID This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID).

Display Link Steps 1. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. 12. Select the Display Link command. of an identified element. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. 2. in the MicroStation command window. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. Utilities 317 .

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. 2. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. Steps 1. reject input. — OR — Exit the command.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The identified element highlights. 318 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. see Precision Input Form. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. route one-lines.

Go to step 2. The system prompts you to identify another element. — OR — Exit the command. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 4. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. Continue identifying elements in the design file. Display System and One-Line Type 12. The system prompts you to identify another element. Go to step 2. 319 . and subsystems (if applicable). Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. system._ _______________ 3.

The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. Activate Plant Coordinate System. Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). 320 . Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. If you desire to change the coordinate system. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Instead.

Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. 13. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 321 ._ _______________ 13.

Operating Information Because the operating sequence. and screen prompts vary for each command. instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section.February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. 322 . Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck. command key-ins.

The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. 13. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 324 . The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The columns are optional for Load Database. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.

Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. When you are finished completing the input information. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred._ _______________ Steps 1. When complete. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select Confirm (√). where you may review the errors. Steps 2. the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process. Database 3. and the process begins. the message above displays. and is displayed automatically to the screen. Enter error and output filenames. The Load database screen displays. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Accept will load database. 13. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. 325 . or accept the displayed defaults. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Select Load database command.

page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). You can change the name of the output file or error file. Key in any information that is not supplied by default. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Create Project for the directory structure. To change the output filename.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. You must load the project database before running any reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. All reports are kept in the /reports directory. an input screen displays. See Reports.) 326 . When you process a report. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. select the output file box and key in a new name.

Select the report you want to run from the list. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. Select the Report command. 4. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. Report Steps 1. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . For instance. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. 13. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. the new file will overwrite that file. 3. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. you should name the output files yourself. 2.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 328 .February 2003 direction. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction.

_ _______________
Rule Checks

Rule Checks

This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. You must load the project database before running any rule checks.

Overview
13. Database
This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. For more detailed information about each rule check, see Reports, page 545 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. When you process a rule check, an input screen displays.

The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields, or change that information according to your specifications.

329

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project, you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously, the new file will destroy the previously created file. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name.

Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Rule command. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report.

330

_ _______________
14. Raceway Processes
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections:

Raceway Processes

Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the design filename you specify. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s ../rway/dgn directory. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file, with the name you specify, that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.

14. EERWAY Processes

331

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Load Database
This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. 1. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading, using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. Thus, you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information, using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

2.

This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin, and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.

one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight

ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev*

332

_ _______________
str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent***

Load Database

Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

* The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway.

Steps
1. Select Load database from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Load database screen displays.

14. EERWAY Processes

2.

Enter drawing name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

333

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground, Background, and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections. When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen, where you may review the errors. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process, and is displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

334

_ _______________
Batch File Option
The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Setup an rway.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.bat:

Batch File Option

SET SET SET SET SET SET

MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\

14. EERWAY Processes

335

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Design
This process unloads a design from a relational database, based on the design filename you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database, nor will it delete information from user-defined tables.

Steps
1. Select Unload from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Design database screen displays.

2.

Enter design name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

3.

Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields.

336

_ _______________
4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Design

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

14. EERWAY Processes

337

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Sheet
This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block, and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing, since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. If the sheet name contains blanks, it must be specified in single quotes.

Steps
1. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Sheet database screen displays.

2. 3.

Key in a sheet name. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names.

338

_ _______________
The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Sheet

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.

14. EERWAY Processes

You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

339

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Cleanup Database
This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. For example, information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted, but for some reason was not removed from the database. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), onelines, and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. It then makes a list of all valid drawings, and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. This process will not delete drawings. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing.

Steps
1. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu, and select Confirm (√). The Cleanup Database screen displays.

2.

Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults.

340

When complete. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file. Background. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. the message above displays. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. page 64 ). Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. The process begins. The . 3. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. 4. the message above displays. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. The . Confirm your selections. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.msg file. 14. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. It will display mostly zeroes. 341 . You may choose between Foreground. is created. Select the desired operating mode.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. 3. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. 342 . Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). Upon completion. 2. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway.env>. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. Steps 1. Enter design name.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. the process writes the file to <current_project>.

EERWAY Processes 343 . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the above message displays. Otherwise. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>.prj/rway/tmp directory. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review.prj/rway/tmp directory. The . The .err file. displays all processing information. background. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. select the Confirm button (√).msg file. Otherwise. the above message displays. 14. Select the desired operating mode. lists all errors that occurred during the process._ _______________ 4. 5. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections. The process begins. When complete. You may choose between foreground.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. 4. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√).February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside).prj/rway/dgn/<filename.env>. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. the process writes the file to <current_project>. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. Key in a name for the envelope file. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. 344 . Upon completion. Enter design name. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2. 3.

the above message displays.msg file. The . EERWAY Processes 345 . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Confirm your selections. 6. the above message displays. displays all processing information. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ 5. background.err file. When complete. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). The process begins. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The . Otherwise. lists all errors that occurred during the process. 14. You may choose between foreground. Select the desired operating mode.prj/rway/tmp directory. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select the Confirm button (√).prj/rway/tmp directory. Otherwise. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 346 .

If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. Each Eden process is described in a separate section. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. manipulate the Eden symbol library. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. and edit the Eden symbol file.EErc file in your home directory. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. page 59 . and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. 15. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. For information about accessing the processes. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB._ _______________ 15. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. Eden Processes 347 . Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. then edit the . List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library.

348 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file.

The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. and key in a new library name. 15. 349 . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. and key in a new filename. select the field. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol source file. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. See Eden Symbol Generation. and key in a new option. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. and key in a new filename. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. select the field. select the field. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. To change the displayed output filename. To change the displayed default library name. select the field. and key in a filename. To change the displayed option._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed error filename. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To enter the symbol source file.

see EDEN. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 4. page 89.err file. page 67 . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. The . the above message displays. The . select Confirm (√). and select Confirm (√). 350 . Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output.msg file. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. background. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and the Eden process begins.February 2003 Steps 1. You can view either file on the screen. 3. and batch operating modes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the message above displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. contains any output from the process. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. For information about operating modes. Select the desired operating mode. Confirm your selections. The . You can choose between foreground. 2.

select the field. and key in the name. To change the displayed output filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. select the field. 15. To change the displayed error filename. To enter the symbol name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new library name. For information about the path to the symbol source file. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new filename._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. Eden Processes 351 . select the field. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

page 67 . When you have completed the input information. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. Select the desired operating mode. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. You can view either file on the screen. background._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .msg file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file. and batch operating modes. 352 . You can choose between foreground. For information about operating modes. The . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the above message displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 2. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and the Eden process begins. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. contains any output from the process. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select Confirm (√). the message above displays. and select Confirm (√).err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 4. The . 3. see Output. page 89. Confirm your selections.February 2003 Steps 1. see EDEN. The .

and key in a new library name. select the field._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. For information about the path to the symbol library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. To change the displayed output filename. 15. and key in a new filename. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. Eden Processes 353 . and key in a new filename.

You can view either file on the screen. page 89. Select the desired operating mode. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. and batch operating modes. Confirm your selections.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the above message displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.February 2003 Steps 1. For information about operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.msg file. see Output. see EDEN. When you have completed the input information. select Confirm (√). The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can choose between foreground. The . 354 . contains any output from the process. background. 3. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. page 67 .err file. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. the message above displays. 2. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. and the Eden process begins. 4. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√).

and key in a new filename. select the field. You can choose between foreground._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. page 67 . and select Confirm (√). see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new filename. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. To change the displayed error filename. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. Steps 1. background. select the field. 3. select the field. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. see EDEN. 15. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. To change the displayed output filename. For information about operating modes. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new library name. 355 . 2. and batch operating modes. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent.

an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The .February 2003 4. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You can view either file on the screen. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the message above displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the list will display. When you have completed the input information. The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing.msg file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. page 89. 356 . The . see Output. Confirm your selections. contains any output from the process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select Confirm (√). the above message displays.

see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. select the field. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. 357 . and key in a name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To enter a library name. To enter a library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and select Confirm (√). Eden Processes Steps 1. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a name. and key in a new filename. 15. 2._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list.

The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . the message above displays.msg file. When you have completed the input information. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The . and batch operating modes. contains any output from the process. the above message displays. background. Select the desired operating mode.February 2003 3. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can choose between foreground.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. page 89. You can view either file on the screen. 4. Confirm your selections. see EDEN. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. page 67 . and the Eden process begins.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). see Output. 358 . For information about operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

and select Confirm (√). Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. see EDEN. and key in a new filename. Steps 1. For information about operating modes. To change the displayed error filename. To change the displayed library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed output filename. and batch operating modes. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. Select the desired operating mode. select the field. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. 15. and key in a new filename. 3. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. Eden Processes 2. 359 . You can choose between foreground. background. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. page 67 .

Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The . the message above displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 360 . and the Eden process begins. You can view either file on the screen. When you have completed the input information.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file.msg file. the above message displays.February 2003 4. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. page 89. The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . contains any output from the process. see Output. Confirm your selections. The .

exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. then edit the . select the field._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. select the field. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. and key in a new library name. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. for example). The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. To change the displayed output filename. 15. select the field. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. To change the displayed error filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. To enter the symbol name. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Eden Processes 361 .EErc file in win32app\eenuc. and key in the name. and key in a new filename. The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC.

When you have completed the input information. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. background.February 2003 Steps 1. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). page 67 . You can view either file on the screen. 4. the above message displays. The . Confirm your selections. contains any output from the process. Select the desired operating mode. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. For information about operating modes. 3. the message above displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√). 2. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see EDEN. The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays. page 89. and batch operating modes. and the Eden process begins. The . The . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 362 . You can choose between foreground.err file.msg file. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list.

For information about the path to the symbol library. Eden Processes 363 . Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. select the field.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. select the field._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. and key in a new filename. then edit the . see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. for example). To enter the user function name. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. and key in a new library name. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. To change the displayed error filename. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. To change the displayed library name. and key in the name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. 15.

When you have completed the input information. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. the message above displays. Select the desired operating mode. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and batch operating modes. The .February 2003 Steps 1. 2. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. For information about operating modes. 4.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 3. background. page 67 . You can choose between foreground.err file. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. and the Eden process begins. Confirm your selections. select Confirm (√). and select Confirm (√). see EDEN. 364 .

_ _______________
Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

Extract EDEN User Function From Library

15. Eden Processes

365

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Edit EDEN Symbol File
This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. It is only available on a graphics terminal.

Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To change the displayed editor, select the field, and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. To enter a symbol filename, select the field, and key in a symbol file name. For information about the path to the symbol source file, see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

366

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list, and select Confirm (√). The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes. For information about operating modes, see EDEN, page 67 . 4. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information, select Confirm (√), and the Eden process begins.

Steps

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

15. Eden Processes

367

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

368

_ _______________
16. Integrated Commands
The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules, providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes, review the PDS clashes in a model, create a window containing a specific element, and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS, not when running standalone EE Raceway.

Integrated Commands

The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar, then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu.

16. Integrated Commands

369

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Using the Integrated Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Before Using These Commands
Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection, and must have an existing clash in the design area.

Group Workflow
There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

Operating Information
See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

370

_ _______________
16.1 Review PDS Attributes
The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments), you need to display construction type elements. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command.

Review PDS Attributes

Parameters
Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.

16. Integrated Commands

371

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.2

Reference PDS Model
The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.

Parameters
Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.

372

_ _______________
Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

Reference PDS Model

16. Integrated Commands

373

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.3

Window to Named PDS Item
The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files.

Options
Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. You can select: Piping, Equipment, PE HVAC, or Raceway. Depending on which discipline you select, the item attributes you can search for changes. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label, Line ID, Inspection Iso ID, Piping Component Number, Pipe Tag, Instrument Component Number, or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag, One Line Tag, Drop Point Tag, or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting.

374

_ _______________
16.4 Review PDS Clash
The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes.

Review PDS Clash

Parameters
Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows; or, select the field and key in a marker number.

16. Integrated Commands

375

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. Click Select View then select the view you want to update.

376

Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. 377 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load.

Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. Recovery: Change element annotation. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. Asid <numeric value>.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. 378 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>.

Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: None. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. 379 . Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support.

and replace the one-line.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. "$". Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation.". Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If the problem persists. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Invalid sys on oneline. Cannot Place Cross Section. If the problem persists. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. 380 . and replace the one-line. call Intergraph support. Cannot Place Cross Section. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. or ". Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. call Intergraph support. digits. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Invalid olt on oneline.

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file.ins is not in the proper location. Recovery: None. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. 381 . A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs.

Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. 382 . Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Could not get one line type from user data. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Please export this variable.

Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: None. based on cause of error. Recovery: There are various recoveries. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. 383 . Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Recovery: None._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error.

Could not write to TCB. 384 . status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. Recovery: Enter correct filename. insert it into the reference database. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. The database is case-dependent. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If the key does not exist. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct.

Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. change the spec. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Recovery: None. Recovery: Enter design filename. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. 385 . Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library.

Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation.February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. 386 . Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again.

Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Error closing propagation log file. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Recovery: Change access to design file. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Propagation status may not be recorded.err did not close properly. Recovery: Change access to design file. Reason: File pro. 387 . Recovery: Enter a new value. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file.

Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. 388 . Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege.

Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. 389 .EErc file. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Reason: Internal error. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Correct entry. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your .

Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. 390 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database.

Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Error opening design file <string>. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. one datum point. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. 391 . and one element. Recovery: Add columns and try again.

Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). 392 .sql file. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line.

A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Add privileges to database. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. 393 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid.sql file. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list.

394 . Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Recovery: Add privilege. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema.February 2003 Error saving symbology .

Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Recovery: Fix other errors. 395 . Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Reason: Internal error._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Key in a value. Recovery: None. Recovery: Add privilege to database. A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length).

Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. at a cross. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . extension or transition of the fitting. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. change the spec.February 2003 File <string> exists. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Reason: An illegal angle exists. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. 396 . For example.

Possible memory allocation problem. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Try to exit and re-enter the software._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Fatal error. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. a form could not be displayed by the software. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. 397 .

Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. 398 . Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group./config/assign file. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area.

For example. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. 399 . Invalid Eden Processor Input. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. <numeric value>. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected.

Recovery: Key in another value. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. click on the REMOVE button to delete. If it is a cable entry. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. For example. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. 400 . quantity must be an integer greater than 0.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. Recovery: Enter an integer value. Invalid key in .

Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Enter a valid response. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. Invalid RCP . 401 . Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. vertex <numeric value>. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached.

Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. 402 . Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element.

More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. RC. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. CT. Recovery: Fix other problems. LC. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. 403 . Recovery: Delete all but one title block._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. CC. . Recovery: Enter LT.. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>. Must be LT. CB. LB. and place the element or RCP. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area.or RB in the justification field. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. or RB. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. RT. LC..

Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file.cel).February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. 404 .

No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. B. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. 405 . A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. C for the cross section type. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. or C in the active specification. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. B. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. Recovery: Key in another name.

No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. 406 . Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type.

One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Recovery: Populate the database. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Populate the database. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. 407 . No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database.

Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. 408 . Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: Select another option. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Recovery: None.

Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. three-line. RCP). title block. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". 409 . A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Recovery: Enter schema name. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Select failed.

Recovery: Enter sheet name. Recovery: Change sheet name. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. 410 . Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Identify a valid text element.

therefore. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Recovery: None. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. A: Error Messages Title block placed . cannot be edited. 411 . Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. snap to the angle.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 412 . Recovery: If necessary. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines./config/assign file and that its value is a full path.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the .

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. 413 . Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Recovery: Key in the desired group name. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. you must key in a group name.

February 2003 414 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases.cmd file contains the alias. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section.cmds file. Appendix I: rway. You can modify or disable this function through the file.cmd file as it is delivered. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files.cmd file and customizing menus. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. 415 . Appendix H: alias. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager. reports.cmds contains the rway. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes. It attaches the panel menu. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file. rule checks. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. B: System/App Mgmt. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product.

February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process. Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them. 416 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

1. ee_out_ht_diam real not null.EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. ee_out_width real. For detailed information about editing your .cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). set the variable EE_PIFORM in the . These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform)._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. To change the form design. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. ee_dimension_1 real. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. and rway. ee_extension real.cmd. ee_dimension_2 real. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. ee_units integer not null. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. alias.unl files and database tables. 417 . Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database.

ee_symbol char(6)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. char(40) ). char(28) not null. 2. refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key). ee_tl_subtype integer. ee_tl_qual integer.unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. ee_part char(20). char(20). or you can add the data to your vendor. Create a <one-line_type>_spec. real. ee_description char(40) ). ee_spec_key char(28).unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db. create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key).unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. 418 . ee_part_key char(28) not null. create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). 3. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. real. All delivered . grant all on trench_spec to public. You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. ee_weight real. ee_angle real. ee_spec2_key char(28).unl file. grant all on trench_part to public. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). char(6).unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type. create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor). For sample files.February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real.

Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database.cmd file. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. 6.unl file. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. INSERT INTO tray_part.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref. 1. B: System/App Mgmt. Customizing 5. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type.unl files to the rwayref. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec.unl file. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref. 7.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part.unl files and database tables._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. For information about codelists. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. 419 . consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. 8. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. For detailed information about editing your .unl file.unl" DELIMITER "|". Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. 9. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part.

Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database.unl file. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). For a sample special fitting . char(40) ). char(20). real not null. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting.unl file. grant all on transit to public.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key).unl" DELIMITER "|". Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database.unl file. For basic information about creating Eden symbols.February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. char(20)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . real. INSERT INTO pullbox. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). refer to the pullbox. 6. real. Create a <special fitting>. 3. 2. or you can insert records in the vendor. char(6). 4. 420 . Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table. 7. Add the newly-created <special fitting>. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. or you add the data to your tlt.cmd file.unl file to the rwayref. char(28) not null. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). 5. real.

Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. or by inserting a record in the manprt. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. 8.unl file. B: System/App Mgmt.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. or by inserting a record in the mscatref. You cannot change this name. 9. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. which you can modify. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports. Use a standard text editor to modify the error. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. 11. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting.msg files. To the right of each = is the message itself. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). 10. or by inserting a record in the mscolref. 421 . see the appendix entitled EE Databases. In these files.unl file. For information about codelists.unl file.

Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols. This variable will override the user preferences setting.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. "am=n.cs"._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . They include Microstation. File containing EE Raceway symbols. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. Sets the directory for the on-line Help files. Sets the directory for temporary files. and EE Raceway-specific variables.h1". Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. Used as a pointer to application programs.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu. 422 . The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee.e. This directory is also the location of user command index (.sb" (i. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. EE Nucleus. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command. or "am=n. "am=ustn.ndx) files.men. Directory for the message files. Defines the path to the on-line Help files. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables.sb1").

B: System/App Mgmt. Directory path for message files. Directory path for the RIS product. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Directory path and project database name. User-defined reference database cmd file. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. Directory path for data files. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. User-defined reference database sql file. Default username for archive/restore. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. Directory path for the Eden symbol library._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. User-defined project database sql file. Directory path for seed files. Default remote path for archive/restore. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Project Database cmd file. Default nodename for archive/restore. Reference Database sql file. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. Filename for the Eden symbol library. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. A variable used for ORACLE databases. it must be set to "A". User-defined project database cmd file. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. Project Database sql file. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. 423 . Directory path for data files.EErc file. Schema name for project database. Reference Database cmd file.

Schema name for reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 424 . Directory path for INGRES executables.February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for ORACLE executables. Directory path for EE symbol file. EE reference database server process. Filename of EE symbol file. Directory path for EE forms. Data files for DB Access Support.

the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. a generic relational database interface. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. Thus. that supports it. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. C: EE Databases 425 . The reference database is identified when you enter a project. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. RIS. (For those familiar with EDES. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. On-line Informix. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). that is. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). Oracle. they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. Processes needed in the procedures above. such as symbol and part information. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. and Ingres.

Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another.) 426 . Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways. in fact. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. which you define._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . to attach to an SQL-type database. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product.

For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS.) This process will create the risschema definition file. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. ownerships. To do so. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. For more information about the risschema file. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. page 50). that was created using RIS Schema Manager. After you have created an empty database. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. local or remote. using the risschema_mgr process. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. C: EE Databases 427 .

If Update schema is used with a .February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. Where a table lacks a unique index.sql file. the process loads it only if the table is empty.sql file. — load those tables having a unique index with data from the . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu. the process will: — add new tables listed in the . you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg. 428 .sql file.sql) file which contains the table and column structure. — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given .cmd) file that defines which ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .sql file] [-c .sql file -c . and then key in the command line syntax for the process.cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema. — AND — — the corresponding .sql file.unl files that are listed in the .sql file that has a different structure than the original .unl file(s) which contain default information. If you want to load a schema with default information. you must have at least: — an SQL (.unl files to load into which tables. you can also include: — a command (.cmd files.cmd file] schema name -v -q . The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q . To run it outside of the EE Environment.

_ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. C: EE Databases 429 . You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema. with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.

Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. and so forth) during a design session. You can establish default attributes for drawings. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. and equipment pointers. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. But if the project schema is custom-built. All specification information is carried in the reference database. the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. for example. 3.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. 430 . RCP. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. For example. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. RCPs. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. Reporting. straights. the drawing. one-lines. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. one-lines. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. tray_spec. fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . including. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. drop points. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. and tray_part tables.February 2003 Reference Schema . Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. 2. raceway connect points (RCPs). Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. one-line. if the reference schema is custom-built. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session.

C: EE Databases 431 . Text annotation overrides any default values. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form.General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form. Text annotation overrides any default values. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. Text annotation overrides any default values._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema .

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 .approved 5 .approved 10 . You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow. For example. Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values.approved 6 . but you must not remove any of the existing rows. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values.approved 11 . During loads of the project database. Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database.approved 3 . The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist. You can add new approval status rows to this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . fitting.blank 2 .approved 9 . and one_line tables in the project database.approved 4 .not approved 432 .approved 8 . the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight.February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database.approved 7 .

The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types. but you must not remove the existing row. 433 . You must not add or remove to this table. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. The table contains the index_column column. You can add new drawing types to this table. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. ee_ol. The table also contains the ee_spec. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . The table contains the index_column column. ee_part.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type.

nor should you modify the index_column values. You can modify the index_value values._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). The system table contains the system_num column. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. remove. You must not add or remove rows from this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. You can add.

The table contains the index_column column.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can modify the index_value values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . You must not add or remove rows from the table. nor should you modify the index_column values.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. nor should you modify the index_column values. The table contains the index_column column._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. nor should you modify the index_column values. The table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 .

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name. The vendor table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. The unit table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove rows from this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You can add vendors as necessary to this table.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. You can modify the index_value values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 . nor should you modify the index_column values. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product.

The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . You may add or remove rows from this table. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column.

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 .February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column.

441 . The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) 443 . which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase.

cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase.non-metallic covering) Moisture.non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. Moisture-. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column.and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant.February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase.and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. non-metallic covering) 444 . flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. Heat. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant. flame. 3 wire system) Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. flame.

Moisture. You must not add or remove rows from this table. Moisture. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description C: EE Databases The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes 445 .& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant.and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant.and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene Codelists Yes-No Codelist Table The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. Moisture. (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-. Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-.and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat. Moisture._ _______________ Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-.

remove. the one-line type. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number. compares the number of intersection one-lines. If found.180 90 90.February 2003 Fitting Environment Rules The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands.270 90. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90. zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP.180 90. or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway. The software.270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY 446 . Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line.180. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. at least.180. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number. You can add._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

270 Non-Planar Angle = 90 C: EE Databases 447 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Fitting Environment Rules Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90. 180.

Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database. and three-lines.February 2003 Project Schema ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 448 . its one-lines. RCPs.General Description The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing.

Updating a Project Schema Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. Updating Reference Schemas Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. using the Update reference schema option. These fields require a full path to the files. and to grant permissions within the schema. not a database name. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. No paths are required. if one exists. views. you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX. Given the schema name. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. C: EE Databases Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. using the Update project schema option. you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database. No paths are required. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. If you select multiple applications._ _______________ Appendix C: Updating Schemas Updating Schemas Before you can update (that is. ORACLE. Additionally. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. since this is a schema name. not a database name. if one exists. Given the schema name. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. INGRES). since this is a schema name. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. Sql and Cmd Files 449 . then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database. load with EE tables and default data) a schema.

then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database. views._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .EErc file to be your project schema name. and to grant permissions within the schema. you should use the same name as your project. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. 450 . The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/. These fields require a full path to the files. However. since this will be the default name when you enter the project. If you select multiple applications. Schema Names When creating your RIS schemas. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process.February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application.

Saves rows from existing table. C: EE Databases If rows exist in the updated table. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ". 5. columns are added into the . 2. then the . you would lose any data that may have been on that column. these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them.sql" file in order to modify a schema. but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. 2.sql file before Update schema is executed. for example). The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. Therefore. 3. you need only to modify the ". When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema.unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty. The . The . Drops existing table (also drops indexes). Creates new table according to "create table" statement. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. The SQL statements in the .sql" file. You can modify the size of a column. columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the . 3. 4.unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index.sql file for the one_line table. For example. any new columns that are added will be blank in each row.sql file. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. To modify the database schema before schema creation.sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. simply include the necessary changes in the . Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_"._ _______________ Appendix C: Modifying the Reference Schema Modifying the Reference Schema You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10). They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. 4. 451 . If a table does not have a unique index. 1. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored. the following actions take place: 1. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. for example. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete.sql file are the input to the Update schema process. from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer". Therefore. then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition.

unl files are being loaded into the reference database.unl file must not be null for that column. or INGRES’s SQL. All existing . The .sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the . Edit the desired .unl files into the database. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the . FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.g. To see which . 2. or ORACLE’s sqlplus.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table.unl files must be loaded for proper product execution. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file: FILE "olt. — OR — You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1. part data. 3.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.unl file. INSERT INTO ol_type. and codelist values. There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt.unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui. 4. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table. In this case the "olt.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1| 452 . These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt. the RDBMS’s interactive query product. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl). These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults. such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS.exe).unl files as defined in the command file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr. The delimiter is one character long.unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .cmd) file you will be using.exe) 2. look at the command (.unl" DELIMITER "|".unl files from being loaded.February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *. The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. Certain columns are defined in the .

"1" is the index_column value. etc. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog.unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. When you have finished editing the . 3. run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table.unl" file you would like to add additional entries. 453 .cmd. INSERT INTO tray_spec.unl. naming it catalog.unl" DELIMITER "|". "TRAY" is the index_value column value. you can edit this file. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database. separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. 1. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref.unl file. For example: Modifying the Reference Schema 1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV| C: EE Databases 4. If in the "olt. 2. Create a new file in the current directory. "240" is the ee_spec_table column._ _______________ Appendix C: In this example. The following example demonstrates how to load a new .

ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. 454 . An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. away_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY.February 2003 EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema. approved. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". approv_status This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status. and so forth. not approved. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table.

ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes C: EE Databases ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. 455 .Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. away_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material.

or C. center left. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. B. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. The only valid entries are: A. and so forth). ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. cardinal This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left. The associated shapes are shown below.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 456 . bottom left. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point.

ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. material: the column used to define the conduit body material. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight. 457 . ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. for example NEC 1990._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. 458 .

C: EE Databases 459 . ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight.

460 . ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. material: the column used to define the conduit material. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size.

drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. B.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. or C. The only valid entries are: A. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. The associated shapes are shown below. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 461 . Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description.

ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. 462 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK.

463 . ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. The only valid entries are: A. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. B. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. or C. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. The associated shapes are shown below.

ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description. 464 .

ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. 465 .

Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. config: the cable configuration of the cable._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. 466 . ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.

Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. where the information crosses products. In some entries.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. If not. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. 467 . then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank.

468 . EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system. Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value.

ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values. 469 . ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. 470 . ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture.

pullbox). Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. In general. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. 471 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database.

EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. RISRPT. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. MicroStation 32. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. and DBAccess all support this table. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. 472 .

A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. In general. index_column: a column name that. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. column_name: the name of a column in the database. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. the work_mode value is set to zero.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. 473 . Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. It must exactly match the column name in the database. if not NULL.

ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. conduit. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description.February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. and so forth). 474 . wireway. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type.

add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. 475 . C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.

476 . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. prj_name: this column contains the project name. location: this column contains the location._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. ee_description:this column contains the key description. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set.

Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length. ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. 478 .February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description.

Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. Zero if no check is to be performed. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. 479 . Zero if no check is to be performed.

February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. wye. tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. reducer. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 480 . flexible. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. horizontal. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. and so forth). bendable. elbow. and so forth). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. cross. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type.

to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. 481 .

ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 482 .

weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. C: EE Databases 483 .

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. 484 . wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. The associated shapes are shown below. B. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. The only valid entries are: A._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . catalog: the column that contains catalog information. or C. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor.

ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 485 .

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The only valid entries are: A. ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. B. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. The associated shapes are shown below. or C. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. 486 . ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type.

cable number. and cable number ID. 487 . Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the revision number._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors. cabsch_spec This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". cable_numb: the column containing the area number. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables.

quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. 488 . undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length.February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule.

conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit. and so forth. drawing_numb can have duplicate values. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description cndsch_spec This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. conduit number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number. but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. control. for example power. and conduit number ID. 489 . Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number.

con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. 490 . ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code.February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

drop_point This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table._ _______________ Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 491 . Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. used by all EE products. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. contains general information about each EE design file. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description drawing This table. C: EE Databases sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name.

February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. and cable number number ID. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number. duct_fill This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. cable number. ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. 492 .

ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems. 493 . Space envelopes are not available at time of printing. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_system This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. envelope This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table.

ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.February 2003 fitting This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. 494 .

vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table._ _______________ Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. 495 . C: EE Databases fit_to_sys This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number.

February 2003 mscatalog This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. 496 . dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations.

the work_mode value is set to zero. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. It must exactly match the column name in the database. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. column_name: the name of a column in the database. there are no EE processors using this table. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. This column can also be thought of as a filter. C: EE Databases 497 . ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. Currently. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form.

prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. 498 . Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. one_line This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing.February 2003 ol_to_sys This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. C: EE Databases 499 . ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type.

ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. project This table contains specification information for the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed.February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date.

Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. location: the column containing location._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). 501 . Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists.

February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. 502 . Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database).

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section. 503 . ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table.

504 . ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. material: the column containing the straight section material. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table.

to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. tag: the column that contains the support tag. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. 505 . Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 506 .

unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product. To initiate the process. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. If you answer n to the prompt. wireway. copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec.sav extension to the specified table name. The process will then write all records to this . SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part.unl file. D: Specs 507 . the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified . and will then write all records to that file. These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types.sav file. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes.sav before running the process. airway. The system will attach a .unl file or to create a new .unl and <one-line type>_spec. Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n). If you intend to add records to an existing . The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray. key in SPEC at the command prompt.unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name.sav file.unl file easily and efficiently. This process allows you to add records to an existing . and conduit.

February 2003 The system processes the information. the system writes the information to the . Copy the .sav file. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record. press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your .sav file and redisplays the column names. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. Once you enter the final value for the displayed table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .sav file back to the corresponding . You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C.unl file to keep the records you have added. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. For subsequent records. 508 .

unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.unl Files The following are examples of . tray_spec.unl files you will load into your reference database tables.unl Files Sample ._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample .

unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. the outside width dimension in sub-units. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. tray_spec and tray_part. Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables.February 2003 tray_part. As described previously. a dimension variable used by Eden. For information about running Update Reference Schema. the . a dimension variable used by Eden. the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. the outside height dimension in sub-units. 510 .unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the spec table contains all specifications. the fitting extension.

the construction type. the tray specification description.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the unique tray specification key. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. the tray material. the tray specification key. the cross section symbol. the index_column value from the tl_qual table. the tray part catalog number. the secondary tray specification key for reducers. the Eden symbol. the tray part weight. * For information about the codelist values. the fitting turn angle. the tray part description. the fitting bend radius. the weight per unit length of the run. D: Specs 511 . Sample ._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the unique tray part key.

60.90.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30.60. and Adjustable 30. and Adjustable 90.45.90.60.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 .90.45._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .45. and Adjustable 30.

). The delivered symbol library is called eden. etc. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives.). use the delivered Eden processes. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. For additional information about the Eden symbol language. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. pullboxes. To review or modify the symbols in this library. draw_arc. However. and special parts (conduit bodies. etc. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. fittings. fittings. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections.) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. and special parts.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden.

========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. 0.0 . ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid. val1. radius. 0.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 . val5. height .or.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid .eq. with or without extensions.eq. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. val3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow.0 . val2.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file.or. height. angle. extension.eq. val4. angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2. angle . 0.

0. Point[0]. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. height. Point[0]. 0. Point[BND2]. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1].0. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. 0. 0. halfwid. 0 ) Endif 515 . Point[0]. 0. val6. 0. (Point[3].0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2]. 0. 0. 0. -halfwid. NUMPTS. -val1. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. 0 ) 0.ne.-extension. Point[0]. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. 0 ) then Do i = 1. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0 ) 0. height. (Point[2]. radius. -halfwid. -val4. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. 0. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. Point[i]. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. Point[0]. NUMPTS. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. halfwid. 0. 0. 0 ) Do i = 1. val2. Point[ORG]. 0. Point[0] ) Point[0]. val5. val3. -val1. 0 ) 0. Point[0]. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0. Point[0]. Point[0]. (Point[4]. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. 0. Point[0].

height. Point[0]. Point[0]. (Point[3]. When defining parts in the reference database. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . 0. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. 1. Point[i].ne. 0 ) 0. Point[0]. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4.Point[BND2]. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[0]. height. -halfwid. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. (Point[2]. Point[1]. 0. 0. extension. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. -angle.Point[2]. NUMPTS. For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. (Point[4]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 ) 0.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. -halfwid. 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. 0. halfwid. 516 . halfwid. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. NUMPTS.Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. 0 ) Do i = 1. 0 ) Do i = 1.Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. 0 ) 0. NUMPTS.

_ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow. ... . Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow.. extension... ..ee_transition Spec Table ..... Dimension 25 Spec Table ....ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ..ee_out_wid Spec Table . EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol.. Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden........ they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string. It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement.. The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives... 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .. Spec Table ... The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation.ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . ... height....ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table . For specification-driven parts. see the table immediately following this description..... If the fitting has extensions....ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . width.ee_extension Spec Table ... In general.. .ee_radius Spec Table ... ... and radius from the global array DIMENSION..ee_extension 517 . the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP...... For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions.... The symbol derives the values for angle... EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database.ee_out_wid Spec Table . the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution. while other critical points are defined relative to the origin.ee_dimension_2 ..

...._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..... .... .......ee_dimension_2 ....... ...... ....... ...February 2003 54 55 56 57 .. ....... Part Table ...... ... ......ee_dimension_1 Part Table .... Dimension 25 Spec Table ..ee_transition Spec Table ...................... Spec Table ....... ..... Dimension 60 From Part Table ... ....ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ... ....ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 .......... 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .. .ee_radius Spec Table ...ee_dimension_60 518 ... 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ......ee_dimension_2 ..

By default. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. 519 . It identifies those files you can modify. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. It also describes the contents of directories and some files._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway.

/usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 .February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory. Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable.. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. The following files exist under the . The product may reside on any file system._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The files are grouped by directory. comments. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process.def – product definition file. — legend – copyright notice file. and EE WPD.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. EE Nucleus._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. etc. — EEnotice. — product. and then invokes the EE environment.txt – File containing release notices. 521 . C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. — . — remove. INFORMIX. problems.

Also kills stray processes. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — mscrecol. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. INFORMIX variables. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. — eeprj – environment process. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — print. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. — risql – EE reporting utility._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — eemgr – system manager environment process. This file can be edited.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — create_db – create database process. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. — mount – supports less disk installation. 522 . and product variables. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — reeprj – remote environment process.

— ustn_tsk – DB Access file. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory.txt – EE project setup information.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager. — eepsp. — dba* files – DB Access files. doc/ – directory that contains documentation. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 .txt – less disk information. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files. — lessd. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . /usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 .

cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files.def – product definition file. comments. — load – processor to load the project database. These files can be modified. — menu. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. problems. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. etc. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. and clean database processes. 527 . config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. — product. unload drawing. — remove.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file. The files are grouped by directory.

— report. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.dat – controls rule check report management. — rule_chk. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory. Sample .dat – controls Eden processes.dat – controls process management. — process. and cell library.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. This may be customized.dat – controls standard report management. — mstr_rway.s – master help source file.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help.hp – help pointer file. available cell libraries. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files. function key menu. Also contains . Attaches the function bar menu.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.February 2003 — eden.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library. You can supply additional menu files. – – seed. and any design files delivered with the product. — eden. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — mstr_rway. msseed.lib – the Eden symbol library file. — rway. — help_rway. — help_rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 528 . This may be customized. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database.s – help source file.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database.

This directory also contains the available precision input forms. and logo.ace)and compiled (. — rway. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. — rwaybar. The software requires this directory.bar – bar menu source file. There is an .arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. — rway_prj.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — error.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — prompt. The source files may be edited by the user. report/ – Contains the source (.msg – message file containing messages for status field. — rway. — rway_ref.ace and an . tmp/ – Holds any temporary files.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. 529 . — status. This file can be extended. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.arc file for each report listed below._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation. – merge_pnl – panel menu file. — rwaypnl. — annot_form – form file for annotation. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — command. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. prompting messages. — alias.pnl – panel menu source file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 530 .

dat. eden. You may want to write your own processes. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list..%EDEN_LIB%. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file. and Output menus..dat 13.Default.Path. and Output.dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.-O.Switch | ..dat.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. Rule.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process.dat. Report. respectively. The manager. Report.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory. # 531 . # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. and print.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert).dat control the scrolling lists for the Process.1 0...Path.dat report.dat manager. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. Rule. \ | Enter symbol source file . . This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process.dat process.Default.._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.bat -c \ | Enter library name .Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.dat rule_chk. rule_chk. # # eden. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. . report.dat print.

....%EDEN_LIB%.. # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name...notepad. # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor. 532 .%EDEN_LIB%.bat -C \ # | Enter library name . \ a t | Enter symbol name .. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. \ | Enter symbol name ...February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%..bat -e \ n | Enter library name . \ \ | Enter symbol name .bat -l \ | Enter library name ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .bat -s \ | Enter library name .. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. d # e n # .bat -m \ | Merge into library name ..bat -u \ | Enter library name . Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -eu \ b | Enter library name . # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. \ | Merge from library name ..bat -d\ | Enter library name ..%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%.. # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%....

%RWAY_DGN%. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. The password will # have to be handled accordingly.%RWAY_DGN%. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable..Default. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load.-f \ | Enter envelope name..dat process. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.exe \ | Enter one design name. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered. .Switch | . # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory.exe \ | Enter design name.Path.dat 13. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both). The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference..Path. # # process.Default.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file. .exe -s \ | Enter sheet._ _______________ Appendix G: process.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 . # So.%RWAY_DGN%.dat #ident "@(#)data:process. This was # done to handle schema passwords.. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line... # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.exe \ | Enter design name.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form.1 0.%RWAY_DGN%.exe \ | Enter design name. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.

dat 7.) as the delimeter.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema. .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.. . # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.February 2003 report.Default | . # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.. # # report.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema.dat #ident "@(#)data:report. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema. # The second field is the command field.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema. # # They are: # Prompt.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.1 0. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name.

) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.. # The second field is the command field.dat 13._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 . # # rule_chk.dat rule_chk.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema. Default | . . . # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.1 0.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt..

PATH. # # print. # The command can be any command to output a file. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT.February 2003 print.. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 .. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list. This field should be used to pass # information to the command. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print.SWITCH..path and switch.DEFAULT.default._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.dat 21. A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt..1 0.. # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name.. # The first column of comment line must be #. # (The path is not relevant).dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory.

.. -s e # # m #Compress database .cmd \ |Enter schema name.INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database . _ r # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted p # t # .Path. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt. G: Customizing Environment 537 ..dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory.Switch | .Path.. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Default.dat 21._ _______________ Appendix G: manager.. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.1 0. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.. . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # # manager.dat #ident "@(#)env:manager.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file.. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ x | Enter schema name.dat manager.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol.Default.

February 2003 538 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. For example.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 .cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias. The alias.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13. You can use any text editor to modify the file. The alias. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element.cmd file.cmd file Appendix H alias. You do not need to add entries to the alias. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias.cmd file. The example in the alias. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. the format of such an entry. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique. H: alias.cmd.cmd file.1 0._ _______________ Appendix H: alias. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name. If you were to add this example to the alias. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software. a sample entry.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 .

_ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file H: alias.cmd file 541 .

February 2003 542 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway. If you do not want the rway.cmd file may also be edited by the user.cmd The file rway.cmd file to be executed.cmd Appendix I rway. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway.cmds 543 . The rway. add mmenus ee_rway:menu. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus.ammfile._ _______________ Appendix I: rway. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user..pr I: rway.amm m.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . the Project Data View Reference Guide. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". both. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. i. Project Dataview. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access.. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports.. This is the name of any current RIS schema._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. layout. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. either local or remote. Created through DB Access. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. in some cases. is supported. Any RISsupported relational database. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. the reference database and. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library.e. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. Report templates created through DB Access. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. and print conditions.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above.

second.. The first parameter is read into wtr_p0.rpt" added to the end. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0". "select value_a from table_b where.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded.) 546 . -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0]. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". Certain variables may be exported. third. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. etc.. Thus. default file name that they write to. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>.. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". If you wish to override this name.. the "-o" option can be used. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5).._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..e.) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed.) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through. and use a schema from the schema list..[wtr_p5] When you create a template. since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. etc. and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used. with a ".

J: Reports 547 . drawing_type. found in $EE_NUC/bin. This file: Selects the desired database tables. sheet. 3. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. dba_rpt . filename.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. Project Database drwlst (RIS) . Selects the desired columns from those tables._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. ref_db. Information Output: Drawing. load_date. Formats information into readable form. and sorts them by sheet name. 2. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template.the RIS process.

ee_tl_type. ee_tl_subtype.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. ee_out_width.the RIS process. description Fitting. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. 3. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width. ee_part. ee_tl_length. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Project Database mto_rpt . ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. This file: Selects the desired database tables. found in $EE_NUC/bin. 548 . system_name Straight. ee_ol_type. dba_rpt . ee_out_ht_diam. Formats information into readable form.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 2. Information Output: System._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Information Output: Straight. ee_tl_length. ee_tl_subtype. dba_rpt . ee_ol_type. 2. ee_out_width. J: Reports 549 . Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_tl_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_ol_type.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. 3. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_part._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID.the RIS process. Formats information into readable form. ee_out_width. Selects the desired columns from those tables. found in $EE_NUC/bin. Project Database rway_bom . description Fitting. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template. For flexible conduit elbow fittings.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. For instance. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. 550 . For flexible conduit elbow fittings. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID.

Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_ht_diam. 3. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_tl_subtype.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_tl_type. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_ol_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables.the RIS process. ee_out_width. dba_rpt . ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_ol_type. Formats information into readable form.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. ee_part. description Fitting. found in $EE_NUC/bin. Project Database rway_bom_vol . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. ee_out_width. J: Reports 551 . 2. ee_tl_length.

552 . Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 3. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_tl_type. ee_out_width.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_width. found in $EE_NUC/bin. Formats information into readable form. ee_ol_type. system_name Straight. 2.the RIS process. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_ol_type. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. ee_tl_subtype. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. description Fitting. Project Database blank_ids . Information Output: System. ee_part. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_length. dba_rpt .

553 . The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. When you select Reset. and dropping RIS schemas. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. any active secondary forms are erased. If you select one of the schemas in the list. RIS Schema Manager terminates. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. changing. then information about that schema is displayed. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. If you select any of the buttons. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. When you select Cancel (X).

You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . with the exception of the Schema Name field. or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. It reads information about existing schemas. 554 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. a read only form.

A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. 3. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. input fields for that information display. 555 . If you select one of the databases. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. Key in all information in the input fields. select one of the Network Protocol fields. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. This form creates new RIS schemas. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. select Run to create the schema. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. Once you have entered all necessary information. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. Select the Display Databases button. If the selected database type requires additional information. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. 2._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr.

To modify the user password. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. select Run to alter the schema. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. To select a schema to drop. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. you need only to enter the new password. Selecting Run drops the schema. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. and the schema node. the user password. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields. To modify the schema node. 556 . When you select one of these options. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. When you have entered all necessary information. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. To select the schema to be altered.

column type. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. This form consists of a list of all the tables. column name. Drop Table. and clears the list. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. views. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. and Alter Table) will accept input. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. The column position. 557 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. If the selected schema requires a password.

Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. In Insert Column Mode. In Drop Column Mode. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. select Run to create the table. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. Once the table definition is complete. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. which behaves as expected. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. Then there is the second set. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. new columns can be added to the table definition. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. columns can be dropped from the table definition. Drop Column. 558 . or by selecting the column in the table definition list. and Modify Column. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. Select Reset to clear the form. column definitions can be modified. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. There is the usual set. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. in the upper right corner of the form. In Modify Column Mode. This form has two sets of Control buttons.

It can only append one new column to an existing table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. select Run to alter the table. K: RIS Schema Mgr. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. Selecting Run drops the table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Once the new column is defined. 559 . Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Reset clears the form. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form.

February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. Additionally. Selecting Reset clears the form. an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Selecting Reset clears the form settings. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. 560 .

not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . This file is the schema lock file. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. currently supported values are X for Informix. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. Although you can use multiple files. The values found in the create schema option clause. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID.LCK extension. Currently supported values are X for XNS. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. D for DNP (DECnet). T for TCP/IP. In these cases. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. I for Ingres. L for LU6. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. If the filename is not a full pathname._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. a unique key to identify the database The database type. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. If there is no network address given. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. A line separates entries. If the lock file does not exist. O for Oracle.2 The network address (must be an address. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. the lock file must be replaced manually. then the schema file is in use.

08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. This value is case-sensitive. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.142. This value is case-sensitive. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370.142. the CICS transaction name. The valid value is lu6. There are two logical units. one on the Clipper. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM.2. This value is case-sensitive. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. This value is case-sensitive.135. This value is case-sensitive. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located.155 PROTOCOL= 562 .135. the other on the IBM. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b.2 and the default value is lu6.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs.

_ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. All these entries are created by the create schema statement. only the first protocol in the list will be used. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. If the file is corrupted or removed.H:. 563 . This allows for additional protocols in the future. Currently.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 564 .

To run EE Manager. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. For detailed information on setting environment variables. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. if you are entering the environment for the first time. see Appendix N. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. Once you have successfully entered your password. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. the EE Manager form displays: 565 ._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system.

It uses DB Access to query and edit tables. 566 . and update rows. In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary.February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive. delete rows._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. 567 . and insert a row or group of rows. To go directly to a certain row. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. The number on the button changes to reflect the row. delete. Release the mouse button to display the row. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. which shows the current find criteria. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. These buttons include various Query functions._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. and functions which enable you to change. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. If no find criteria exist. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. or edit the value displayed in the field. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. which allow you to search the database. this command finds all rows in the current table.

Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. When you select Update Active. 568 . AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. As long as this command is active. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. By default. When you are certain the data is correct. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. Multiple column searches are processed in order. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. and Update Active fields. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. Add Query columns.

Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 ._ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 570 .

This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. 571 .cfg file to the list. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee.cfg is located. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu.cfg file._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable.

6. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. Steps 1. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. 7. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. 572 . click on the Delete button. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. 2. 5. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cfg file. When complete. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. continue the same process as above. if any. The description. 4. To delete the variable. 8. Edit the entry in the Value field. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. To edit the values of other variables. This same field can be used to add a new variable. Double click on the EE Configure icon. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. appears in the Descrip field.cfg file. The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee.

created through NQS. NFS. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. An attribute of a database table. In network operations. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. character client column command confirm button 573 . NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. and then manipulated as individual elements. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. All network operations (database. or channel for moving requests. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. and the keyboard. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. A group of columns defines a table in a database. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. Software designed to meet specific needs. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. A queue. the menus._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. unlike system software which runs other software. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. See also path name and relative path name. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. it controls the message fields.

The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A separating mark or space. though this is not required. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. disk drive. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. and to select commands from forms and menus. identify and accept elements. a component onto which a user cannot log. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. that is. and Z axes of the design cube. Y. A nonaddressable component of a network. and user-generated quit signals. illegal instructions. tape drive. and floppy disk. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. and activate windows and perform window manipulations.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder.0. the most common of which are memory violations. Normally. To remove. destroy. bus errors. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. eliminate. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system.0. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. or Z axis. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. or processed by a specific program. to accept previously selected elements. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. Y. For example. whereby points are located by traversing the X. interpreted. Also known as key-in field. place elements. or erase. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. for example. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 .

and so forth. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move.) of interest about which information is stored. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. that responds to information. a relational database table. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. An object (project. See interference envelope. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. including the file name. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. such as a button._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. difference in longitude. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. element. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. When selected. drawing. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . a field. or a checklist. A pictorial representation or image. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. See also relative path name. or positive. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information.

a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. A point on an element. Also known as a data entry field. or it can mean the connected system. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. and the Key-in field. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. A name. Network File System.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. It is divided into the Command Status field. or alias. to which you can snap. A graphic representation or schema. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. the Current Command field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . including vertices. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. the Prompt field. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table.

See also path name and absolute path name. vendor’s catalog data. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. The sequence of directories leading to a file. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. y. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. commodity libraries. report formats and other information of a similar manner. having no elevations or depressions. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . To turn. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. The point at which the coordinate system is placed._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. Network Queuing System. In coordinate geometry. and z-axes intersect. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. Reference Database. See also absolute path name and relative path name. A relational database management system supported by RIS. graphics symbology. job specifications. or indicate a specific point in the design file. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. label descriptions. the point where the x. and is three-dimensional. to change the angular orientation. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. but is level.

To switch. A name that provides access to an account on the system. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. y. The software uses virtual memory to store data. The x. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. and so forth. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. including color. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. and z axes. and querying relational databases. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. One collection of column values for a table. Views are created with their own x. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes.z). Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. The defined area of vision on a screen. stay on the disk until they are called for. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. A collection of data for quick reference. and weight.y._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . dash-dot. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. The display style of an element. modifying. generally represented as a line. See also active depth. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. In network operations. NFS. Language developed by IBM for creating.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. the software can perform processing more quickly. This means that unneeded files and data. to change between two alternatives. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. All network operations (database. style. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. either entered by the user or determined by the software. that are stored in an attribute. solid. Data.

Glossary N: EE Configure 579 ._ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.

February 2003 580 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 234 override button 180. 415. 234 select button 180. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 234. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 235 source column 179. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 234 list column 179. 550 bin/ 521. 235 display toggle 179. 327. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 109. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179.cmd 529. 235 override keys 179.

527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 . 275.msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522.February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 278. 276 model 271 library 269. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 279 equipment pointer 274.

278. 279 equipment pointer 274. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 527 database 321. 275. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 .

dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 . 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277. 278._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179. 279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden.

81.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 79. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 .cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 276 keys 431 place 144 error. 87. 82. 83.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522._ _______________ ee. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274. 80. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 275. 84. 86. 78.

359. 264._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .hp 528 help_rway.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 271 eden symbol 353. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104. 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 357. 342. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 234. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179.

cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .sh 522 msg/ 523._ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu.

55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 . 52._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 48. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180. 179. 234. 235 keys 115.hp 528 mstr_rway.s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178.dgn 528 mstr_rway.February 2003 msseed. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46.

527 product. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 55. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521.def 521.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 . 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521. 567 process. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157. 297 sketch 113. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112.dat 522. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print.dat 528.

tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cmd file 543 rway. 534 reports 117.dat 528.dat 528. 327. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 .sym 529 rway.tbl 529 rway_ref.pnl 529 rwaypnl.cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk.sym 529 rway_prj.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.

_ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178. 449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 .msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27.

65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 . 449 reference 55. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 48. 449 project 52. 109. 52. 415.unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 55 processing 53._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 55. 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27.

_ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109. 327. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 594 .

** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.02. .00.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.

.....................2)................... 634 EE Raceway File Structure............... 625 Move Group................................................................................................................ 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 598 Load Reference Schema ............ 597 Modeling...................................................... 621 Mirror Group .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5.................................................................................................................... 599 Utilities .................................. 611 Mirror Element ... 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9.........................................................................................................................................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment . 613 Mirror Copy Element...... 617 Rotate Group......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 627 Annotate Model...............................................................................................................................2) .................................... 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.......4).. 607 Rotate Element...... 609 Rotate Copy Element..................................................................... 633 EE Nucleus File Structure .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 637 596 .... 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9................ 623 Mirror Copy Group...............3) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) ............................. 619 Rotate Copy Group .....................................

Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. reporting. 597 . and rule checks. the EE Raceway Environment form displays. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. EDEN symbols.

Click Accept.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. 598 . Select a model from the list. The selected model displays in MicroStation. 4. Click Accept. 2. The Raceway Designer form displays. 3. Select a design area from the list. Steps 1.

the process loads it only if the table is empty. If you update the schema with a . — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given .sql file. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition. If a table lacks a unique index.unl files that are listed in the . SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.sql file. 599 .unl files to load into which tables. keeping column data where column names match.sql file. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the . SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which . Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project.Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.sql file.sql file that has a different structure from the original . SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.cmd files. — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .

CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables.unl files to load into which tables. 600 .

Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. and Rule commands. Report.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. 601 . These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. EDEN. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. The following information has been modified: Rotate.1 version of the document). Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. 602 . Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. Rotate Copy. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Mirror. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7.

This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. 603 . or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. then selecting Palette. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. 604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu.

Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify Group Commands. then selecting Palette. then selecting Palette.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. 605 .

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. 606 . then selecting Palette. Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window.

You can use individual commands to move. Mirror. and three-lines. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. 607 .Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. Rotate Copy. and delete specified elements. onelines. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. The following information has been modified: Rotate. including RCPs. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. Annotate Element — Places. then selecting Palette. and so forth). • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction.1 version of the document). within the design file. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. three-lines.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. annotation. to review or edit element annotation. reviews. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. copy. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. then selecting Modify Element Commands. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details.

Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. and elements associated with it. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. 608 . Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. from the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element.

reset a command action. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. three-line fittings. and equipment pointers will also be moved.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. You can use this command to move one-lines. you can locate elements. RCPs. All associated annotation. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. equipment pointers. If an RCP is rotated. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. and annotation. Using the form. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. three-line fittings. and equipment pointers will also be moved. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. drop points. If a one-line is rotated. 609 . accept input. reject input. To change the angle. route one-lines. All associated annotation.

The element rotates to the specified position. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. The Specify Rotation form displays. 610 . The Rotate Element precision input form displays. Steps 1. 5. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. the system displays the message Element not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Click Accept. 4. 2. Select the Rotate Element command. The system highlights the specified element. 3. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The message disappears when you identify a valid element.

For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. route one-lines. reset a command action. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. accept input. reject input. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. 611 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. To change the angle. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point.

Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The system highlights the specified element. The Specify Rotation form displays. Select the Rotate Copy Element command. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. 5. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. 4. 2. Click Accept. The element copy displays at the specified position. 612 . 3. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays.

Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Secondary. accept input. see Precision Input Form. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. If an RCP is rotated. If a one-line is mirrored. Using the form. drop points. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. three-line fittings. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. select the field and type a new angle. three-line fittings. and annotation. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. you can locate elements. All associated annotation. All associated annotation. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. toggle among the three axes (Primary. and equipment pointers will also be moved. RCPs. To change the displayed axis. To reset a 613 . the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. reset a command action. To change the displayed angle. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. route one-lines. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. equipment pointers. and exit a command.

Click Accept. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. 614 . The Mirror Element precision input form displays. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. 3. Steps 1.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Orient Mirror form displays. The element rotates to the specified position. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 5. 2. Select the Mirror Element command. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. 4. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The system highlights the specified element.

the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Steps 1. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Using the form. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. accept input. Select the Mirror Copy Element command. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. For detailed information about precision input. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. To change the displayed axis. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. toggle among the three axes (Primary. To change the displayed angle. Secondary. 615 . At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. select the field and type a new angle. reset a command action.

The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. 3. Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 616 . 5. The Orient Mirror form displays. The system highlights the specified element. Specify the point around which to mirror the element. Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 4. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The element copy displays at the specified position.

or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. The following information has been modified: Rotate. and to review or edit element annotation. and delete elements of specified groups. then selecting Palette.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7. annotation. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Mirror Copy. three-lines. and Move Group commands See the following text for details. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. Rotate Copy. copy. You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Mirror. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. 617 . and so forth). Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model.1 version of the document). • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file.

Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. 618 . Annotate Element by Group — Places. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. reviews. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.

equipment pointers. drop points. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. three-line fittings. If a one-line is rotated. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. All associated annotation. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. and annotation. you can locate elements. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. 619 . All associated annotation. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. RCPs. reset a command action. and equipment pointers will also be moved. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. and equipment pointers will also be moved.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. reject input. route one-lines. and exit a command. three-line fittings. To change the angle. If an RCP is rotated. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. see Precision Input Form. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. accept input. You can use this command to move one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form.

Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The system highlights the specified group. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 5. 620 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For groups in Single Element mode. The Specify Rotation form displays. Steps 1.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 2. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. The group rotates to the specified position. 4. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 3. the system displays the message Group not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Rotate Group command.

route one-lines. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. Steps 1. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. To change the angle. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. reject input. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. see Precision Input Form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. accept input. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. 621 . The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point.

If you do not locate an acceptable group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. The Specify Rotation form displays. Click Accept. 4. The system highlights the specified group. 2. 3. The group copy displays at the specified position. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. 5. For groups in Single Element mode. 622 . Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. the system displays the message Group not found. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element.

accept input. To change the displayed axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. reset a command action. To change the displayed angle. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. see Precision Input Form. If one-lines are mirrored. All associated annotation. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Using the form. three-line fittings. you can locate elements. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Secondary. To reset a 623 . and equipment pointers will also be moved. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field and type a new angle. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. three-line fittings. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. All associated annotation. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. reject input. and exit a command. If an RCP is rotated. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

The group moves to the specified position. The Orient Mirror form displays. Steps 1. 624 . the system displays the message Group not found. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. The system highlights the specified group. Click Accept. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 5. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. 3. 4. For groups in Single Element mode. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 2. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Mirror Group command. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. Steps 1. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To change the displayed axis. and exit a command. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. reset a command action.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. 625 . select the field and type a new angle. reject input. Using the form. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. For detailed information about precision input. To change the displayed angle. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Secondary. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. see Precision Input Form. route one-lines. you can locate elements. toggle among the three axes (Primary.

Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. 5. For groups in Single Element mode. 3. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. The Orient Mirror form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. If you do not locate an acceptable group. 4. 626 . The group copy displays at the specified position. The system highlights the specified group. Click Accept. the system displays the message Group not found. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Specify the point around which to mirror the group.

route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. 4. Steps 1. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. the system displays the message Group not found. you can locate elements. If you do not locate an acceptable group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. The Move Group precision input form displays. 627 . 2. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The group moves to the specified position. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Move Group command. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. 3. The system highlights the specified group. reject input. accept input.

628 . • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. If you toggled Display to On.1 version of the document). Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . toggle the Display fields in the form to On. Steps 1. If you want to display the annotation in the model.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. The Load Database process. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. If the user does not specify a sheet number. 4. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project.dgn file name of the raceway model. Select the Annotate Model command. The Annotate Element form displays. 285 in the PDS 7. —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. will prevent such duplication. 3. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. however. 2.

then.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.1 version of the document). Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. click Attach. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. then. The following information has been modified: Display. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. 629 . and Locate toggles See the following text for details. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. click Attach. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. Snap. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model.

Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Snap. Snap. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. 630 . or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Attach – Attaches a reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.

panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing.1 version of the document).exe file See the following text for details.2. Before running the upgrade utility.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7. use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. and EE_SCHEMA. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east. PROJECT_LOCATION. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. pds_north. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 . and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name.

panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. 632 .

It identifies those files you can modify. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. 633 .1 version of the document). By default.

The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. The following files exist under the . EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory..\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 . The product may reside on any file system.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.

INFORMIX. — dba_shell. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — EEnotice. EE Nucleus.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. — license. — .txt– copyright notice file. 635 .\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. The files are grouped by directory. — remove. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. and EE Raceway.txt – File containing release notices. bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. comments. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. problems. etc. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. eenuc — readme.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. and then invokes the EE environment. — create_db – create database process.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt.

help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files. — print. — mscrecol. doc – directory that contains documentation. — eeqpr. share sym – contains EE symbol files. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable.exe – environment process.dat – ASCII file for output file management.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. — dba* files – DB Access files. — manager. 636 . db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — reeprj – remote environment process. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms. — Eemgr. — eeprj.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — menu_shel.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database.

EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway. \eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .

The files are grouped by directory. eerway — readme.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. 638 . problems. comments. etc.txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes.

Also contains . bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product.dat – controls process management. unload drawing.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine.dat – controls standard report management. Sample .— remove.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. and clean database processes. and any design files delivered with the product.dat – controls rule check report management. — rway_schma. — process.dat – controls Eden processes. — report. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. — load – processor to load the project database. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. — eden. 639 . available cell libraries. These files can be modified. — rule_chk. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. dgn – Contains the seed file directory.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process.

dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views. 640 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view.

msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. eden – contains the Eden symbol library. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. This file can be extended.lib – the Eden symbol library file. — alias. — seed. This may be customized.— seed – contains the available seed design files. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. This may be customized. — msseed. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. — eden.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. 641 . — error. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — command. — prompt.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.

The source files may be edited by the user.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. — rway_ref.ace and an . and logo.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. tmp – Holds any temporary files. report – Contains the source (.arc file for each report listed below.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.ace)and compiled (. There is an . These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. The software requires this directory. prompting messages.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. — status.sym – symbol file for the bar menu.msg – message file containing messages for status field. — rwaypnl. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. — rwaybar. 642 .

607 setup. 605 modify element. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 629 Annotate Model command. 605 EE Raceway. 628 rotate. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 616 modify. 620 schema load reference. 602 Intergrated Commands. 620 rotate copy. 608 modify group. 635 EE Raceway. 638 element mirror. 626 modify. 629 Modify Element commands. 602 EERway. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 604 design. 608 Modify Group commands. 610. 628 palettes bar commands. 614 mirror copy. 618 Move Group command.Index annotate model. 638 group mirror. 606 PDS reference model. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 630 reference schema load. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 626 Mirror Element command. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 635 Raceway file structure. 601 643 . 634 EE Nucleus. 606. 604. 608 rotate copy. 599 utilities. 622 Rotate Element command. 618 move. 624 mirror copy. 618 runtime setup. 634 Nucleus file structure. 629 EE file structure. 610 Rotate Group command. 614 Mirror Group command. 602 model commands. 612 file structure EE. 607 modify. 624 model annotate.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful